- remove all trailing whitespace

     * except when it is escaped with a `\' at the end of the line
- fix remaining .Nm usage as well
- this is from a patch I received from kwesterback@home.com, who has been
  working on some scripts for fixing formatting errors in mdoc'd man pages

Ok, so there could be a cost/benefit debate with this commit, but since I have
the patch we might as well commit it...

204 files changed, 1088 insertions, 1088 deletions

diff --git a/share/man/man3/end.3 b/share/man/man3/end.3
index 9edfd92b3b2..2c56714e6b7 100644
--- a/share/man/man3/end.3
+++ b/share/man/man3/end.3
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-.\"	$OpenBSD: end.3,v 1.5 1998/11/29 15:47:22 aaron Exp $
+.\"	$OpenBSD: end.3,v 1.6 1999/07/09 13:35:37 aaron Exp $
 .\"	$NetBSD: end.3,v 1.5 1996/03/01 00:17:49 jtc Exp $
 .\"
 .\" Copyright (c) 1986
@@ -50,9 +50,9 @@ The global variables
 and
 .Va edata
 correspond to
-the next address following 
+the next address following
 the end of the text segment,
-the end of initialized data segment and 
+the end of initialized data segment and
 the end of the data segment
 .Pq Tn BSS .
 .Sh SEE ALSO
diff --git a/share/man/man3/stdarg.3 b/share/man/man3/stdarg.3
index 6b971897e07..630627bfb88 100644
--- a/share/man/man3/stdarg.3
+++ b/share/man/man3/stdarg.3
@@ -100,11 +100,11 @@ macro expands to an expression that has the type and value of the next
 argument in the call.
 The parameter
 .Fa ap
-is the 
+is the
 .Em va_list Fa ap
 initialized by
 .Fn va_start .
-Each call to 
+Each call to
 .Fn va_arg
 modifies
 .Fa ap
@@ -112,7 +112,7 @@ so that the next call returns the next argument.
 The parameter
 .Fa type
 is a type name specified so that the type of a pointer to an
-object that has the specified type can be obtained simply by 
+object that has the specified type can be obtained simply by
 adding a
 .Dq \&*
 to
@@ -126,9 +126,9 @@ random errors will occur.
 .Pp
 The first use of the
 .Fn va_arg
-macro after that of the 
+macro after that of the
 .Fn va_start
-macro returns the argument after 
+macro returns the argument after
 .Fa last .
 Successive invocations return the values of the remaining
 arguments.
@@ -136,7 +136,7 @@ arguments.
 The
 .Fn va_end
 macro handles a normal return from the function whose variable argument
-list was initialized by 
+list was initialized by
 .Fn va_start .
 .Pp
 The
@@ -186,7 +186,7 @@ These macros are
 .Em not
 compatible with the historic macros they replace.
 A backward compatible version can be found in the include
-file 
+file
 .Aq Pa varargs.h .
 .Sh BUGS
 Unlike the
diff --git a/share/man/man4/acd.4 b/share/man/man4/acd.4
index 36b658fa057..a40bbad3869 100644
--- a/share/man/man4/acd.4
+++ b/share/man/man4/acd.4
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-.\"	$OpenBSD: acd.4,v 1.4 1999/06/05 13:18:31 aaron Exp $
+.\"	$OpenBSD: acd.4,v 1.5 1999/07/09 13:35:48 aaron Exp $
 .\"
 .\" Copyright (c) 1996, Jason Downs.  All rights reserved.
 .\"
@@ -34,7 +34,7 @@
 .Cd "acd* at atapibus? drive?"
 .Sh DESCRIPTION
 The
-.Nm acd 
+.Nm acd
 driver provides support for ATAPI CD-ROM drives, using standard IDE
 controllers.
 .Sh FILES
diff --git a/share/man/man4/ahc.4 b/share/man/man4/ahc.4
index dd2972525bf..e47d014a20b 100644
--- a/share/man/man4/ahc.4
+++ b/share/man/man4/ahc.4
@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
-.\"	$OpenBSD: ahc.4,v 1.5 1998/09/05 17:41:48 deraadt Exp $
+.\"	$OpenBSD: ahc.4,v 1.6 1999/07/09 13:35:48 aaron Exp $
 .\"	$NetBSD: ahc.4,v 1.1.2.1 1996/08/25 17:22:14 thorpej Exp $
 .\"
-.\" Copyright (c) 1995, 1996 
+.\" Copyright (c) 1995, 1996
 .\" 	Justin T. Gibbs.  All rights reserved.
 .\"
 .\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
@@ -70,7 +70,7 @@ For one or more SCSI busses:
 .Sh DESCRIPTION
 This driver provides access to the
 .Tn SCSI
-bus connected to an Adaptec 
+bus connected to an Adaptec
 274x, 284x, 2940, 3940, or controllers based on the
 .Tn AIC7770,
 .Tn AIC7850,
@@ -85,7 +85,7 @@ ultra
 two active commands at a time per non-tagged queuing target,
 tagged queuing,
 and SCB paging which allows up to 255 active commands on all adapters
-except those using 
+except those using
 .Tn AIC7770
 chips prior to revision E.
 Tagged queuing is enabled with the
@@ -95,19 +95,19 @@ SCB paging is enabled with the
 .Dq Dv AHC_SCBPAGING_ENABLE
 configuration option.
 .Pp
-Per target configuration performed in the 
+Per target configuration performed in the
 .Tn SCSI-Select
 menu, accessible at boot
-in 
+in
 .No non- Ns Tn EISA
-models or through an 
+models or through an
 .Tn EISA
-configuration utility for 
+configuration utility for
 .Tn EISA
 models,
-is honored by this driver with the stipulation that the 
+is honored by this driver with the stipulation that the
 .Tn BIOS
-must be enabled for 
+must be enabled for
 .Tn EISA
 adaptors.  This includes synchronous/asynchronous transfers,
 maximum synchronous negotiation rate,
@@ -118,8 +118,8 @@ Note that I/O addresses are determined automatically by the probe routines,
 but care should be taken when using a 284x
 .Pq Tn VESA No local bus controller
 in an
-.Tn EISA 
-system.  Ensure that the jumpers setting the I/O area for the 284x match the 
+.Tn EISA
+system.  Ensure that the jumpers setting the I/O area for the 284x match the
 .Tn EISA
 slot into which the card is inserted to prevent conflicts with other
 .Tn EISA
@@ -130,7 +130,7 @@ Some Quantum drives (at least the Empire 2100 and 1080s) will not run on an
 Rev B in synchronous mode at 10MHz.  Controllers with this problem have a
 42 MHz clock crystal on them and run slightly above 10MHz, causing the
 drive much confusion.  Setting a maximum synchronous negotiation rate of 8MHz
-in the 
+in the
 .Tn SCSI-Select
 utility
 will allow normal function.
@@ -143,18 +143,18 @@ Cannot handle SCSI ID greater than 7 with WIDE SCSI adapter.
 .Pp
 It is dangerous to simultaneously access SCSI devices more than half
 number of SCBs. It may cause fatal disk trouble. In this case,
-diagnostics message 
+diagnostics message
 .Dq not queued, error ...
 is displayed to console.
 For example, AHA-274x and AHA-284x have only 4 SCBs, so that using 3 SCSI
 devices is dangerous, using 2 devices is OK.
 .Pp
 When you suddenly access SCSI devices on free physical memory shortage
-conditions, and if there have been very few load on SCSI devices until 
+conditions, and if there have been very few load on SCSI devices until
 then, it may cause fatal disk trouble. In this case, diagnostics
-message 
+message
 .Dq ahc0: Can't malloc SCB
-and 
+and
 .Dq not queued, error ...
 is displayed to console.
 .Pp
diff --git a/share/man/man4/atalk.4 b/share/man/man4/atalk.4
index 9dc9ffeed3c..4f8f0fb86f6 100644
--- a/share/man/man4/atalk.4
+++ b/share/man/man4/atalk.4
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-.\"	$OpenBSD: atalk.4,v 1.3 1999/07/03 02:11:12 aaron Exp $
+.\"	$OpenBSD: atalk.4,v 1.4 1999/07/09 13:35:48 aaron Exp $
 .\"
 .\" This file is derived from the atalk.4 man page in the Netatlk 1.4b2
 .\" distribution. That distribution is covered by the following copyright:
@@ -26,7 +26,7 @@
 .\"	Ann Arbor, Michigan
 .\"	+1-313-764-2278
 .\"	netatalk@umich.edu
-.\" 
+.\"
 .Dd November 14, 1997
 .Dt ATALK 4
 .Os
@@ -37,7 +37,7 @@
 .Fd #include <sys/types.h>
 .Fd #include <netatalk/at.h>
 .Sh DESCRIPTION
-The 
+The
 .Tn AppleTalk
 Protocol Family provides presentation layer support for the AppleTalk
 Datagram Delivery Protocol (DDP), using the SOCK_DGRAM socket type.
@@ -100,7 +100,7 @@ configured).
 .\"causes the address in outgoing packets to be determined when a packet
 .\"is sent, i.e. determined late.
 .\".Dv ATADDR_LATENET
-.\"is equivalent to opening one socket for each network interface. 
+.\"is equivalent to opening one socket for each network interface.
 The port of a socket and
 .\"either
 the primary address
@@ -130,11 +130,11 @@ and Zone Information Protocol
 .Pq Tn ZIP .
 .Pp
 .Tn DDP
-is implemented in the kernel as 
+is implemented in the kernel as
 .Dv SOCK_DGRAM
 sockets in the
 .Dv AF_APPLETALK
-address family. 
+address family.
 .Nx
 All other
 .Tn AppleTalk
@@ -151,7 +151,7 @@ client.
 .Tn NBP ,
 and
 .Tn ZIP
-services are provided by the 
+services are provided by the
 .Tn atalkd
 daemon.
 .Tn ASP
diff --git a/share/man/man4/audio.4 b/share/man/man4/audio.4
index b3f931bbeb4..8af6b5a5bac 100644
--- a/share/man/man4/audio.4
+++ b/share/man/man4/audio.4
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-.\"	$OpenBSD: audio.4,v 1.8 1998/09/05 17:41:48 deraadt Exp $
+.\"	$OpenBSD: audio.4,v 1.9 1999/07/09 13:35:48 aaron Exp $
 .\"	$NetBSD: audio.4,v 1.20 1998/05/28 17:27:15 augustss Exp $
 .\"
 .\" Copyright (c) 1996 The NetBSD Foundation, Inc.
@@ -327,7 +327,7 @@ is calculated to correspond to 50ms of sound and it is recalculated
 when the encoding parameter changes, but if the
 .Va blocksize
 is set explicitly this value becomes sticky, i.e., it is remains
-even when the encoding is changed. 
+even when the encoding is changed.
 The stickyness can be cleared by reopening the device or setting the
 .Va blocksize
 to 0.
diff --git a/share/man/man4/bridge.4 b/share/man/man4/bridge.4
index 6b2dbedd11f..bc272375a8e 100644
--- a/share/man/man4/bridge.4
+++ b/share/man/man4/bridge.4
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-.\"	$OpenBSD: bridge.4,v 1.10 1999/06/25 22:27:46 jason Exp $
+.\"	$OpenBSD: bridge.4,v 1.11 1999/07/09 13:35:48 aaron Exp $
 .\"
 .\" Copyright (c) 1999 Jason L. Wright (jason@thought.net)
 .\" All rights reserved.
@@ -77,7 +77,7 @@ interface responds to all of the
 .Xr ioctl 2
 calls specific to other interfaces listed in
 .Xr netintro 4 .
-The following 
+The following
 .Xr ioctl 2
 calls are specific to
 .Nm bridge
diff --git a/share/man/man4/cd.4 b/share/man/man4/cd.4
index 65d40506897..1bf672851da 100644
--- a/share/man/man4/cd.4
+++ b/share/man/man4/cd.4
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-.\"	$OpenBSD: cd.4,v 1.4 1999/07/03 02:11:12 aaron Exp $
+.\"	$OpenBSD: cd.4,v 1.5 1999/07/09 13:35:48 aaron Exp $
 .\"	$NetBSD: cd.4,v 1.3 1996/10/20 23:15:21 explorer Exp $
 .\"
 .\" Copyright (c) 1996
@@ -38,30 +38,30 @@
 .Sh DESCRIPTION
 The
 .Nm cd
-driver provides support for a 
+driver provides support for a
 .Tn SCSI
 .Tn CD-ROM
 (Compact Disc-Read Only Memory) drive.
-In an attempt to look like a regular disk, the 
+In an attempt to look like a regular disk, the
 .Nm
 driver synthesizes a partition table, with one partition covering the entire
 .Tn CD-ROM .
 It is possible to modify this partition table using
 .Xr disklabel 8 ,
-but it will only last until the 
+but it will only last until the
 .Tn CD-ROM
 is unmounted.
-In general the interfaces are similar to those described by 
-.Xr wd 4 
+In general the interfaces are similar to those described by
+.Xr wd 4
 and
 .Xr sd 4 .
 .Pp
 As the
 .Tn SCSI
-adapter is probed during boot, the 
+adapter is probed during boot, the
 .Tn SCSI
 bus is scanned for devices. Any devices found which answer as `Read-only'
-type devices will be `attached' to the 
+type devices will be `attached' to the
 .Nm
 driver.
 .Pp
@@ -69,7 +69,7 @@ The system utility
 .Xr disklabel 8
 may be used to read the synthesized
 disk label
-structure, which will contain correct figures for the size of the 
+structure, which will contain correct figures for the size of the
 .Tn CD-ROM
 should that information be required.
 .Sh KERNEL CONFIGURATION
@@ -78,7 +78,7 @@ Any number of
 devices may be attached to the system regardless of system
 configuration as all resources are dynamically allocated.
 .Sh IOCTLS
-The following 
+The following
 .Xr ioctl 2
 calls which apply to
 .Tn SCSI
@@ -164,7 +164,7 @@ the information printed at boot.  This structure is defined in
 .\"	/* The tray has dynamic debugging */
 .\"};
 .\".Ed
-.It Dv CDIOCPLAYTRACKS	
+.It Dv CDIOCPLAYTRACKS
 .Pq Li "struct ioc_play_track"
 Start audio playback given a track address and length.  The structure
 is defined as follows:
@@ -190,7 +190,7 @@ struct ioc_play_blocks
 };
 .Ed
 
-.It Dv CDIOCPLAYMSF	
+.It Dv CDIOCPLAYMSF
 .Pq Li "struct ioc_play_msf"
 Start audio playback given a `minutes-seconds-frames' address and
 length.  The structure is defined as follows:
@@ -206,7 +206,7 @@ struct ioc_play_msf
 };
 .Ed
 
-.It Dv CDIOCREADSUBCHANNEL 
+.It Dv CDIOCREADSUBCHANNEL
 .Pq Li "struct ioc_read_subchannel"
 Read information from the subchannel at the location specified by this
 structure:
@@ -228,7 +228,7 @@ struct ioc_read_subchannel {
 
 .It Dv CDIOREADTOCHEADER
 .Pq Li "struct ioc_toc_header"
-Return summary information about the table of contents for the mounted 
+Return summary information about the table of contents for the mounted
 .Tn CD-ROM .
 The information is returned into the following structure:
 .Bd -literal -offset indent
@@ -239,7 +239,7 @@ struct ioc_toc_header {
 };
 .Ed
 
-.It Dv CDIOREADTOCENTRYS 
+.It Dv CDIOREADTOCENTRYS
 .Pq Li "struct ioc_read_toc_entry"
 Return information from the table of contents entries mentioned.  (Yes, this
 command name is misspelled.)  The argument structure is defined as follows:
@@ -280,44 +280,44 @@ struct	ioc_vol
 };
 .Ed
 
-.It Dv CDIOCSETMONO	
+.It Dv CDIOCSETMONO
 Patch all output channels to all source channels.
 
 .It Dv CDIOCSETSTEREO
 Patch left source channel to the left output channel and the right
 source channel to the right output channel.
 
-.It Dv CDIOCSETMUTE	
+.It Dv CDIOCSETMUTE
 Mute output without changing the volume settings.
 
 .It Dv CDIOCSETLEFT
 .It Dv CDIOCSETRIGHT
 Attach both output channels to the left (right) source channel.
 
-.It Dv CDIOCSETDEBUG	
-.It Dv CDIOCCLRDEBUG	
+.It Dv CDIOCSETDEBUG
+.It Dv CDIOCCLRDEBUG
 Turn on (off) debugging for the appropriate device.
 
-.It Dv CDIOCPAUSE	
-.It Dv CDIOCRESUME	
+.It Dv CDIOCPAUSE
+.It Dv CDIOCRESUME
 Pause (resume) audio play, without resetting the location of the read-head.
 
-.It Dv CDIOCRESET	
+.It Dv CDIOCRESET
 Reset the drive.
 
-.It Dv CDIOCSTART	
-.It Dv CDIOCSTOP	
+.It Dv CDIOCSTART
+.It Dv CDIOCSTOP
 Tell the drive to spin-up (-down) the
 .Tn CD-ROM .
 
 .It Dv CDIOCALLOW
 .It Dv CDIOCPREVENT
-Tell the drive to allow (prevent) manual ejection of the 
+Tell the drive to allow (prevent) manual ejection of the
 .Tn CD-ROM
 disc.  Not all drives support this feature.
 
-.It Dv CDIOCEJECT	
-Eject the 
+.It Dv CDIOCEJECT
+Eject the
 .Tn CD-ROM .
 
 .\".It Dv CDIOCCLOSE
@@ -341,14 +341,14 @@ Eject the
 .\".Ed
 .El
 .Pp
-In addition the general 
+In addition the general
 .Xr scsi 4
-ioctls may be used with the 
+ioctls may be used with the
 .Nm
-driver, if used against the `whole disk' partition (i.e. 
+driver, if used against the `whole disk' partition (i.e.
 .Pa /dev/rcd0c ) .
 .Sh NOTES
-When a 
+When a
 .Tn CD-ROM
 is changed in a drive controlled by the
 .Nm
@@ -364,12 +364,12 @@ The audio code in the
 .Nm
 driver only supports
 .Tn SCSI-2
-standard audio commands. Because many 
+standard audio commands. Because many
 .Tn CD-ROM
 manufacturers have not followed the standard, there are many
 .Tn CD-ROM
 drives for which audio will not work. Some work is planned to support
-some of the more common `broken' 
+some of the more common `broken'
 .Tn CD-ROM
 drives; however, this is not yet under way.
 .Sh FILES
@@ -389,7 +389,7 @@ None.
 .Xr scsi 4 ,
 .Xr sd 4 ,
 .Xr disklabel 5 ,
-.Xr disklabel 8 
+.Xr disklabel 8
 .Sh BUGS
 The names of the structures used for the third argument to
 .Fn ioctl
diff --git a/share/man/man4/ch.4 b/share/man/man4/ch.4
index 8508f13cf28..9e8cbbbbb09 100644
--- a/share/man/man4/ch.4
+++ b/share/man/man4/ch.4
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-.\"	$OpenBSD: ch.4,v 1.4 1999/07/03 02:11:12 aaron Exp $
+.\"	$OpenBSD: ch.4,v 1.5 1999/07/09 13:35:48 aaron Exp $
 .\"	$FreeBSD$
 .\" Copyright (c) 1996
 .\"	Julian Elischer <julian@freebsd.org>.  All rights reserved.
@@ -36,7 +36,7 @@
 .Sh DESCRIPTION
 The
 .Xr ch
-driver provides support for a 
+driver provides support for a
 .Em scsi
 juke box. It allows many slots of media to be multiplexed between a number
 of drives.
@@ -44,15 +44,15 @@ of drives.
 A scsi adapter and a logical scsibuss must also be separately configured
 into the system before a scsi changer can be configured.
 .Pp
-As the scsi adapter is probed during boot, the 
+As the scsi adapter is probed during boot, the
 .Em SCSI
 bus is scanned for devices. Any devices found which answer as 'Changer'
-type devices will be 'attached' to the 
+type devices will be 'attached' to the
 .Nm
 driver.
 The first device found will be attached as
 .Em ch0
-and the next, 
+and the next,
 .Em ch1
 etc.
 It is also possible to specify what ch unit a device should
@@ -67,17 +67,17 @@ are configured; Most storage for them is allocated only when found
 so a large number of configured devices is cheap. (once the first
 has included the driver).
 .Sh IOCTLS
-The following 
+The following
 .Xr ioctl 2
 call applies to the changer. It is defined in
 the header file
 .Em sys/chio.h.
 .Bl -tag -width DIOCSDINFO
-CHIOOP	
+CHIOOP
 This appears to be a 'do-everything' call.
 .El
 .Sh NOTES
-The 
+The
 .Nm
 driver was added to the system by
 .Pp
diff --git a/share/man/man4/clnp.4 b/share/man/man4/clnp.4
index 15595975a05..abfe711eb84 100644
--- a/share/man/man4/clnp.4
+++ b/share/man/man4/clnp.4
@@ -47,7 +47,7 @@
 .Fn socket AF_ISO SOCK_RAW 0
 .Sh DESCRIPTION
 .Tn CLNP
-is the connectionless-mode network protocol used by the 
+is the connectionless-mode network protocol used by the
 connectionless-mode network service. This protocol is specified in
 .Tn ISO
 8473.
@@ -64,11 +64,11 @@ and
 calls, though the
 .Xr connect 2
 call may also be used to fix the destination for future
-packets (in which case the 
+packets (in which case the
 .Xr read 2
 or
 .Xr recv 2
-and 
+and
 .Xr write 2
 or
 .Xr send 2
@@ -116,7 +116,7 @@ service option is added to the packet. The sequencing preferred bit and
 the low transit delay bit are set in this option.
 .Pp
 If a packet is forwarded containing the globally unique quality of
-service option, and the interface through which the packet will be 
+service option, and the interface through which the packet will be
 transmitted has a queue length greater than
 .Em congest_threshold ,
 then the congestion experienced bit is set in the quality of service option.
@@ -125,7 +125,7 @@ The threshold value stored in
 .Em congest_threshold
 may be tuned.
 .Pp
-When a packet is received with the 
+When a packet is received with the
 globally unique quality of service option present, and the
 congestion experienced bit is set, then the transport congestion
 control function is called.
@@ -144,7 +144,7 @@ connected;
 When the system runs out of memory for
 an internal data structure;
 .It Bq Er EADDRNOTAVAIL
-When an attempt is made to create a 
+When an attempt is made to create a
 socket with a network address for which no network interface
 exists;
 .It Bq Er EHOSTUNREACH
diff --git a/share/man/man4/cltp.4 b/share/man/man4/cltp.4
index 7b48c59c35d..547d05daeac 100644
--- a/share/man/man4/cltp.4
+++ b/share/man/man4/cltp.4
@@ -63,11 +63,11 @@ and
 calls, though the
 .Xr connect 2
 call may also be used to fix the destination for future
-packets (in which case the 
+packets (in which case the
 .Xr recv 2
 or
 .Xr read 2
-and 
+and
 .Xr send 2
 or
 .Xr write 2
@@ -115,7 +115,7 @@ when an attempt
 is made to create a socket with a selector which has already been
 allocated;
 .It Bq Er EADDRNOTAVAIL
-when an attempt is made to create a 
+when an attempt is made to create a
 socket with a network address for which no network interface
 exists.
 .El
diff --git a/share/man/man4/ddb.4 b/share/man/man4/ddb.4
index 0471743a685..23bc3a06a83 100644
--- a/share/man/man4/ddb.4
+++ b/share/man/man4/ddb.4
@@ -1,30 +1,30 @@
-.\"	$OpenBSD: ddb.4,v 1.14 1999/05/16 19:56:21 alex Exp $
+.\"	$OpenBSD: ddb.4,v 1.15 1999/07/09 13:35:48 aaron Exp $
 .\"	$NetBSD: ddb.4,v 1.5 1994/11/30 16:22:09 jtc Exp $
 .\"
 .\" Mach Operating System
 .\" Copyright (c) 1991,1990 Carnegie Mellon University
 .\" All Rights Reserved.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\" Permission to use, copy, modify and distribute this software and its
 .\" documentation is hereby granted, provided that both the copyright
 .\" notice and this permission notice appear in all copies of the
 .\" software, derivative works or modified versions, and any portions
 .\" thereof, and that both notices appear in supporting documentation.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\" CARNEGIE MELLON ALLOWS FREE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE IN ITS "AS IS"
 .\" CONDITION.  CARNEGIE MELLON DISCLAIMS ANY LIABILITY OF ANY KIND FOR
 .\" ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\" Carnegie Mellon requests users of this software to return to
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\"  Software Distribution Coordinator  or  Software.Distribution@CS.CMU.EDU
 .\"  School of Computer Science
 .\"  Carnegie Mellon University
 .\"  Pittsburgh PA 15213-3890
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\" any improvements or extensions that they make and grant Carnegie Mellon
 .\" the rights to redistribute these changes.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .Dd November 30, 1993
 .Dt DDB 4
 .Os
@@ -34,7 +34,7 @@
 .Sh DESCRIPTION
 The kernel debugger has most of the features of the old kdb,
 but with a more rational
-.No ( Xr gdb 1 
+.No ( Xr gdb 1
 \&- like) syntax.
 .Pp
 .Nm ddb
@@ -90,7 +90,7 @@ to be the same.
 .\" .Ar address
 .\" in a command sets
 .\" .Va dot .
-An expression can be used in place of 
+An expression can be used in place of
 .Ar address
 (see
 .Sx EXPRESSIONS . )
@@ -111,7 +111,7 @@ a
 of 1, and no modifiers.
 .Pp
 .Nm ddb
-has a feature like 
+has a feature like
 .Xr more 1
 for the output.  If the number of lines output in response to
 one command exceeds the number set in the
@@ -294,7 +294,7 @@ ecx = yyyyyy
 .Ed
 .\" --------------------
 .\" .It Xo Ic w Ns Op Cm /bhl
-.\" .Op Ar addr 
+.\" .Op Ar addr
 .\" .Ar expr Op expr ...
 .\" .Xc
 .It Xo
@@ -532,7 +532,7 @@ command is a synonym for
 .\" --------------------
 .It Xo
 .Ic trace
-.Op Cm /u 
+.Op Cm /u
 .Op Ar frameaddr Ns
 .Op Ic \&, Ns Ar count
 .Xc
@@ -542,7 +542,7 @@ modifier shows the stack trace of user space;
 If omitted, the kernel stack is traced instead.
 The
 .Ar count
-argument is the limit on the number of frames to be followed. 
+argument is the limit on the number of frames to be followed.
 If
 .Ar count
 is omitted, all frames are printed.
@@ -632,9 +632,9 @@ command.
 Display information on all processes.
 .Bl -tag -width foo -compact
 .It Cm /n
-(Default) Show process information in a 
+(Default) Show process information in a
 .Xr ps 1 Ns
-\&-like format.  Information printed includes process ID, parent 
+\&-like format.  Information printed includes process ID, parent
 process ID, process group, UID, process status, process flags, process
 command name, and process wait channel message.
 .It Cm /a
@@ -717,7 +717,7 @@ are:
 .It Ar identifier
 The name of a symbol.
 It is translated to the address (or value) of the symbol.
-.Ql \&. 
+.Ql \&.
 and
 .Ql \&:
 can be used in the identifier.
@@ -729,10 +729,10 @@ if supported by an object format dependent routine:
 .Oo Ar filename Li \&: Oc Ar func
 .Oo \&: Ar linenumber Oc
 .It
-.Op Ar filename \&: 
+.Op Ar filename \&:
 .Ar variable
 .It
-.Ar filename 
+.Ar filename
 .Op \&: Ar linenumber
 .Sm on
 .El
@@ -780,7 +780,7 @@ and modifiers as described above with
 A binary operator which rounds up the left hand side to the next
 multiple of right hand side.
 .It Li \&* Ns Ar expr
-Indirection. 
+Indirection.
 It may be followed by a ':' and  modifiers as described above.
 .Sh SEE ALSO
 .Xr gdb 1 ,
diff --git a/share/man/man4/de.4 b/share/man/man4/de.4
index b7c719533e2..dc636f4b2b0 100644
--- a/share/man/man4/de.4
+++ b/share/man/man4/de.4
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-.\"	$OpenBSD: de.4,v 1.7 1999/06/05 13:18:31 aaron Exp $
+.\"	$OpenBSD: de.4,v 1.8 1999/07/09 13:35:48 aaron Exp $
 .\"
 .\" Copyright (c) 1997 David E. O'Brien
 .\"
@@ -40,7 +40,7 @@ driver provides support for the Ethernet adapters based on the Digital
 Equipment DC21x4x based self-contained Ethernet chips.
 .Pp
 It supports the DEC PCI DE435 card, DEC EISA DE425, DEC DE450, DEC DE500,
-SMC 8432, 9332 and 9334, Cogent EM100FX and EM440TX, Asante, 
+SMC 8432, 9332 and 9334, Cogent EM100FX and EM440TX, Asante,
 ZNYX ZX3xx, and others based on the 21040 and 21041 Ethernet controllers
 or
 the 21140[A], 21141, 21142 and 21143 Fast 100Mbps Ethernet controllers.
@@ -93,7 +93,7 @@ method of configuration is not supported.
 .It "de%d: waking device from sleep/snooze mode"
 The 21041 and 21140A chips support suspending the operation of the card.
 .It "de%d: error: desired IRQ of %d does not match device's actual IRQ of %d"
-The device probe detected that the board is configured for a different 
+The device probe detected that the board is configured for a different
 interrupt than the one specified in the kernel configuration file.
 .It "de%d: not configured; limit of %d reached or exceeded"
 There is a limit of 32
diff --git a/share/man/man4/eap.4 b/share/man/man4/eap.4
index e2208c1ca92..7bd5002647b 100644
--- a/share/man/man4/eap.4
+++ b/share/man/man4/eap.4
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-.\" $OpenBSD: eap.4,v 1.1 1998/06/02 23:25:14 provos Exp $
+.\" $OpenBSD: eap.4,v 1.2 1999/07/09 13:35:48 aaron Exp $
 .\" $NetBSD: eap.4,v 1.2 1998/05/06 19:14:06 augustss Exp $
 .\" Copyright (c) 1997 The NetBSD Foundation, Inc.
 .\" All rights reserved.
@@ -23,7 +23,7 @@
 .\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE NETBSD FOUNDATION, INC. AND CONTRIBUTORS
 .\" ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED
 .\" TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
-.\" PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED.  IN NO EVENT SHALL THE FOUNDATION OR CONTRIBUTORS 
+.\" PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED.  IN NO EVENT SHALL THE FOUNDATION OR CONTRIBUTORS
 .\" BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
 .\" CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF
 .\" SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
diff --git a/share/man/man4/esis.4 b/share/man/man4/esis.4
index 6d6c62bbdaa..0872bdd7976 100644
--- a/share/man/man4/esis.4
+++ b/share/man/man4/esis.4
@@ -51,7 +51,7 @@ addresses and
 .Tn ISO SNPA
 addresses; to permit End and Intermediate Systems
 to learn of each other's existence; and to allow Intermediate Systems
-to inform End Systems of (potentially) better routes to use when 
+to inform End Systems of (potentially) better routes to use when
 forwarding
 .Tn NPDU Ns s
 to a particular destination.
@@ -180,7 +180,7 @@ it is necessary to manually configure the location of an
 using the route command in a similar way.
 There, the destination address should be
 .Dq default
-(spelled 
+(spelled
 out literally as 7
 .Tn ASCII
 characters), and the gateway should be
diff --git a/share/man/man4/fd.4 b/share/man/man4/fd.4
index 7ab5ab196ad..95b7970f489 100644
--- a/share/man/man4/fd.4
+++ b/share/man/man4/fd.4
@@ -77,7 +77,7 @@ fd = fcntl(STDERR_FILENO, F_DUPFD, 0);
 Flags to the
 .Xr open 2
 call other than
-.Dv O_RDONLY , 
+.Dv O_RDONLY ,
 .Dv O_WRONLY
 and
 .Dv O_RDWR
diff --git a/share/man/man4/fpa.4 b/share/man/man4/fpa.4
index cad55411356..5a7158150a3 100644
--- a/share/man/man4/fpa.4
+++ b/share/man/man4/fpa.4
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-.\"	$OpenBSD: fpa.4,v 1.6 1999/07/03 02:11:12 aaron Exp $
+.\"	$OpenBSD: fpa.4,v 1.7 1999/07/09 13:35:46 aaron Exp $
 .\"	$NetBSD: fpa.4,v 1.2 1997/02/18 01:07:46 jonathan Exp $
 .\"
 .\" Copyright (c) 1995, Matt Thomas
@@ -9,7 +9,7 @@
 .Dt FEA 4
 .Os
 .Sh NAME
-.Nm fpa , 
+.Nm fpa ,
 .Nm fea
 .Nd
 Device Drivers for DEC FDDI Controllers
@@ -28,7 +28,7 @@ controller are supported including the DAS and SAS configurations.
 .Sh DIAGNOSTICS
 .Bl -diag
 .It "fea%d: error: desired IRQ of %d does not match device's actual IRQ (%d)"
-The device probe detected that the DEFEA board is configured for a different 
+The device probe detected that the DEFEA board is configured for a different
 interrupt than the one specified in the kernel configuration file.
 .It "fea%d: error: memory not enabled! ECU reconfiguration required"
 The device probe found that no device memory had been configured on the
@@ -39,7 +39,7 @@ Utility) will need to be run to change the settings.
 .Sh CAVEATS
 Normally, the device driver will not enable the reception of SMT frames.
 However if the IFF_LINK1 flag is set, the device driver will enable the
-reception of SMT frames and pass them up to the Berkeley Packet Filter for 
+reception of SMT frames and pass them up to the Berkeley Packet Filter for
 processing.
 .Sh SEE ALSO
 .Xr arp 4 ,
diff --git a/share/man/man4/icmp.4 b/share/man/man4/icmp.4
index ee666e42448..25efd2b7e28 100644
--- a/share/man/man4/icmp.4
+++ b/share/man/man4/icmp.4
@@ -70,11 +70,11 @@ and
 calls, though the
 .Xr connect 2
 call may also be used to fix the destination for future
-packets (in which case the 
+packets (in which case the
 .Xr read 2
 or
 .Xr recv 2
-and 
+and
 .Xr write 2
 or
 .Xr send 2
@@ -102,7 +102,7 @@ connected;
 when the system runs out of memory for
 an internal data structure;
 .It Bq Er EADDRNOTAVAIL
-when an attempt is made to create a 
+when an attempt is made to create a
 socket with a network address for which no network interface
 exists.
 .El
diff --git a/share/man/man4/idp.4 b/share/man/man4/idp.4
index 2c94f116605..ee89ef71141 100644
--- a/share/man/man4/idp.4
+++ b/share/man/man4/idp.4
@@ -61,11 +61,11 @@ and
 calls, though the
 .Xr connect 2
 call may also be used to fix the destination for future
-packets (in which case the 
+packets (in which case the
 .Xr recv 2
 or
 .Xr read 2
-and 
+and
 .Xr send 2
 or
 .Xr write 2
@@ -116,7 +116,7 @@ when an attempt
 is made to create a socket with a port which has already been
 allocated;
 .It Bq Er EADDRNOTAVAIL
-when an attempt is made to create a 
+when an attempt is made to create a
 socket with a network address for which no network interface
 exists.
 .El
diff --git a/share/man/man4/imp.4 b/share/man/man4/imp.4
index 356842efcfb..a8fef2e492f 100644
--- a/share/man/man4/imp.4
+++ b/share/man/man4/imp.4
@@ -51,7 +51,7 @@ raw socket interface
 The raw imp socket provides direct access to the
 .Nm imp
 network interface.  Users send packets through
-the interface using the 
+the interface using the
 .Xr send 2
 calls, and receive packets with the
 .Xr recv 2 ,
@@ -96,7 +96,7 @@ an internal data structure;
 eight messages to the destination host are outstanding,
 and another eight are already queued for output;
 .It Bq Er EADDRNOTAVAIL
-when an attempt is made to create a 
+when an attempt is made to create a
 socket with a network address for which no network interface
 exists.
 .El
diff --git a/share/man/man4/inet.4 b/share/man/man4/inet.4
index 28b4680b260..7264a852cfe 100644
--- a/share/man/man4/inet.4
+++ b/share/man/man4/inet.4
@@ -82,7 +82,7 @@ Sockets may be created with the local address
 .Dv INADDR_ANY
 to effect
 .Dq wildcard
-matching on incoming messages. 
+matching on incoming messages.
 The address in a
 .Xr connect 2
 or
diff --git a/share/man/man4/ip.4 b/share/man/man4/ip.4
index eef89fcb448..05bac174a3d 100644
--- a/share/man/man4/ip.4
+++ b/share/man/man4/ip.4
@@ -45,7 +45,7 @@
 .Ft int
 .Fn socket AF_INET SOCK_RAW proto
 .Sh DESCRIPTION
-.Tn IP 
+.Tn IP
 is the network layer protocol used
 by the Internet protocol family.
 Options may be set at the
@@ -68,7 +68,7 @@ There are several
 .Xr setsockopt 2 / Ns
 .Xr getsockopt 2
 options.
-.Dv IP_OPTIONS 
+.Dv IP_OPTIONS
 may be used to provide
 .Tn IP
 options to be transmitted in the
@@ -80,7 +80,7 @@ options may be used with any socket type in the Internet family.
 The format of
 .Tn IP
 options to be sent is that specified by the
-.Tn IP 
+.Tn IP
 protocol specification (RFC-791), with one exception:
 the list of addresses for Source Route options must include the first-hop
 gateway at the beginning of the list of gateways.
@@ -92,16 +92,16 @@ use a zero-length buffer:
 setsockopt(s, IPPROTO_IP, IP_OPTIONS, NULL, 0);
 .Ed
 .Pp
-.Dv IP_TOS 
-and 
-.Dv IP_TTL 
+.Dv IP_TOS
+and
+.Dv IP_TTL
 may be used to set the type-of-service and time-to-live
-fields in the 
-.Tn IP 
-header for 
-.Dv SOCK_STREAM 
-and 
-.Dv SOCK_DGRAM 
+fields in the
+.Tn IP
+header for
+.Dv SOCK_STREAM
+and
+.Dv SOCK_DGRAM
 sockets. For example,
 .Bd -literal
 int tos = IPTOS_LOWDELAY;       /* see <netinet/in.h> */
@@ -111,22 +111,22 @@ int ttl = 60;                   /* max = 255 */
 setsockopt(s, IPPROTO_IP, IP_TTL, &ttl, sizeof(ttl));
 .Ed
 .Pp
-If the 
-.Dv IP_RECVDSTADDR 
-option is enabled on a 
-.Dv SOCK_DGRAM 
+If the
+.Dv IP_RECVDSTADDR
+option is enabled on a
+.Dv SOCK_DGRAM
 socket,
 the
 .Xr recvmsg
-call will return the destination 
-.Tn IP 
-address for a 
-.Tn UDP 
-datagram. 
-The msg_control field in the msghdr structure points to a buffer 
-that contains a cmsghdr structure followed by the 
-.Tn IP 
-address. 
+call will return the destination
+.Tn IP
+address for a
+.Tn UDP
+datagram.
+The msg_control field in the msghdr structure points to a buffer
+that contains a cmsghdr structure followed by the
+.Tn IP
+address.
 The cmsghdr fields have the following values:
 .Bd -literal
 cmsg_len = sizeof(struct in_addr)
@@ -147,18 +147,18 @@ Reserved ports; between 600 and 1023.
 .El
 .Ss "Multicast Options"
 .Pp
-.Tn IP 
-multicasting is supported only on 
-.Dv AF_INET 
+.Tn IP
+multicasting is supported only on
+.Dv AF_INET
 sockets of type
-.Dv SOCK_DGRAM 
-and 
+.Dv SOCK_DGRAM
+and
 .Dv SOCK_RAW,
 and only on networks where the interface
 driver supports multicasting.
 .Pp
-The 
-.Dv IP_MULTICAST_TTL 
+The
+.Dv IP_MULTICAST_TTL
 option changes the time-to-live (TTL)
 for outgoing multicast datagrams
 in order to control the scope of the multicasts:
@@ -174,36 +174,36 @@ group and if multicast loopback has not been disabled on the sending socket
 (see below).  Multicast datagrams with TTL greater than 1 may be forwarded
 to other networks if a multicast router is attached to the local network.
 .Pp
-For hosts with multiple interfaces, each multicast transmission is 
+For hosts with multiple interfaces, each multicast transmission is
 sent from the primary network interface.
-The 
-.Dv IP_MULTICAST_IF 
-option overrides the default for 
+The
+.Dv IP_MULTICAST_IF
+option overrides the default for
 subsequent transmissions from a given socket:
 .Bd -literal
 struct in_addr addr;
 setsockopt(s, IPPROTO_IP, IP_MULTICAST_IF, &addr, sizeof(addr));
 .Ed
 .sp
-where "addr" is the local 
-.Tn IP 
+where "addr" is the local
+.Tn IP
 address of the desired interface or
-.Dv INADDR_ANY 
+.Dv INADDR_ANY
 to specify the default interface.
-An interface's local IP address and multicast capability can 
-be obtained via the 
-.Dv SIOCGIFCONF 
-and 
-.Dv SIOCGIFFLAGS 
-ioctls. 
+An interface's local IP address and multicast capability can
+be obtained via the
+.Dv SIOCGIFCONF
+and
+.Dv SIOCGIFFLAGS
+ioctls.
 Normal applications should not need to use this option.
 .Pp
 If a multicast datagram is sent to a group to which the sending host itself
 belongs (on the outgoing interface), a copy of the datagram is, by default,
-looped back by the IP layer for local delivery. 
-The 
-.Dv IP_MULTICAST_LOOP 
-option gives the sender explicit control 
+looped back by the IP layer for local delivery.
+The
+.Dv IP_MULTICAST_LOOP
+option gives the sender explicit control
 over whether or not subsequent datagrams are looped back:
 .Bd -literal
 u_char loop;	/* 0 = disable, 1 = enable (default) */
@@ -223,16 +223,16 @@ to the sending host on a different interface from that on which it was sent,
 if the host belongs to the destination group on that other interface.  The
 loopback control option has no effect on such delivery.
 .Pp
-A host must become a member of a multicast group before it can receive 
-datagrams sent to the group.  To join a multicast group, use the 
-.Dv IP_ADD_MEMBERSHIP 
+A host must become a member of a multicast group before it can receive
+datagrams sent to the group.  To join a multicast group, use the
+.Dv IP_ADD_MEMBERSHIP
 option:
 .Bd -literal
 struct ip_mreq mreq;
 setsockopt(s, IPPROTO_IP, IP_ADD_MEMBERSHIP, &mreq, sizeof(mreq));
 .Ed
 .sp
-where 
+where
 .Fa mreq
 is the following structure:
 .Bd -literal
@@ -242,20 +242,20 @@ struct ip_mreq {
 }
 .Ed
 .sp
-.Dv imr_interface 
+.Dv imr_interface
 should
-be 
-.Dv INADDR_ANY 
-to choose the default multicast interface, 
-or the 
-.Tn IP 
+be
+.Dv INADDR_ANY
+to choose the default multicast interface,
+or the
+.Tn IP
 address of a particular multicast-capable interface if
 the host is multihomed.
-Membership is associated with a single interface; 
-programs running on multihomed hosts may need to 
-join the same group on more than one interface.  
-Up to 
-.Dv IP_MAX_MEMBERSHIPS 
+Membership is associated with a single interface;
+programs running on multihomed hosts may need to
+join the same group on more than one interface.
+Up to
+.Dv IP_MAX_MEMBERSHIPS
 (currently 20) memberships may be added on a
 single socket.
 .Pp
@@ -265,10 +265,10 @@ struct ip_mreq mreq;
 setsockopt(s, IPPROTO_IP, IP_DROP_MEMBERSHIP, &mreq, sizeof(mreq));
 .Ed
 .sp
-where 
+where
 .Fa mreq
-contains the same values as used to add the membership. 
-Memberships are dropped when the socket is closed or the process exits.  
+contains the same values as used to add the membership.
+Memberships are dropped when the socket is closed or the process exits.
 .\"-----------------------
 .Ss "Raw IP Sockets"
 .Pp
@@ -282,11 +282,11 @@ and
 calls, though the
 .Xr connect 2
 call may also be used to fix the destination for future
-packets (in which case the 
+packets (in which case the
 .Xr read 2
 or
 .Xr recv 2
-and 
+and
 .Xr write 2
 or
 .Xr send 2
@@ -309,17 +309,17 @@ Outgoing packets automatically have an
 header prepended to
 them (based on the destination address and the protocol
 number the socket is created with),
-unless the 
-.Dv IP_HDRINCL 
+unless the
+.Dv IP_HDRINCL
 option has been set.
 Incoming packets are received with
 .Tn IP
 header and options intact.
 .Pp
-.Dv IP_HDRINCL 
+.Dv IP_HDRINCL
 indicates the complete IP header is included with the data
-and may be used only with the 
-.Dv SOCK_RAW 
+and may be used only with the
+.Dv SOCK_RAW
 type.
 .Bd -literal
 #include <netinet/ip.h>
@@ -328,8 +328,8 @@ int hincl = 1;                  /* 1 = on, 0 = off */
 setsockopt(s, IPPROTO_IP, IP_HDRINCL, &hincl, sizeof(hincl));
 .Ed
 .sp
-Unlike previous 
-.Tn BSD 
+Unlike previous
+.Tn BSD
 releases, the program must set all
 the fields of the IP header, including the following:
 .Bd -literal
@@ -344,7 +344,7 @@ ip->ip_len = htons(len);
 Additionally note that starting with
 .Ox 2.1 ,
 the ip_off and ip_len fields are in network byte order.
-If the header source address is set to 
+If the header source address is set to
 .Dv INADDR_ANY,
 the kernel will choose an appropriate address.
 .Sh DIAGNOSTICS
@@ -362,7 +362,7 @@ connected;
 when the system runs out of memory for
 an internal data structure;
 .It Bq Er EADDRNOTAVAIL
-when an attempt is made to create a 
+when an attempt is made to create a
 socket with a network address for which no network interface
 exists.
 .It Bq Er EACCES
diff --git a/share/man/man4/ipsec.4 b/share/man/man4/ipsec.4
index 36538de40a5..e453adffbee 100644
--- a/share/man/man4/ipsec.4
+++ b/share/man/man4/ipsec.4
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-.\" $OpenBSD: ipsec.4,v 1.21 1999/07/03 20:41:20 deraadt Exp $
+.\" $OpenBSD: ipsec.4,v 1.22 1999/07/09 13:35:46 aaron Exp $
 .\" Copyright 1997 Niels Provos <provos@physnet.uni-hamburg.de>
 .\" All rights reserved.
 .\"
@@ -277,7 +277,7 @@ packets that have been successfully processed by
 .Pp
 Security Associations can be set up manually with the
 .Xr ipsecadm 1
-utility or automatically with the 
+utility or automatically with the
 .Xr photurisd 8
 or
 .Xr isakmpd 8
diff --git a/share/man/man4/isapnp.4 b/share/man/man4/isapnp.4
index 177eb4a0b9b..ff932c48a42 100644
--- a/share/man/man4/isapnp.4
+++ b/share/man/man4/isapnp.4
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-.\"	$OpenBSD: isapnp.4,v 1.9 1999/07/07 20:28:08 aaron Exp $
+.\"	$OpenBSD: isapnp.4,v 1.10 1999/07/09 13:35:46 aaron Exp $
 .\"	$NetBSD: isapnp.4,v 1.8 1998/06/07 09:08:46 enami Exp $
 .\"
 .\" Copyright (c) 1997 Jonathan Stone
@@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
 .Cd "isapnp0 at isa?"
 .Pp
 An
-.Nm
+.Nm isapnp
 bus can be configured for each supported ISA bus.
 .Sh DESCRIPTION
 .Ox
diff --git a/share/man/man4/iso.4 b/share/man/man4/iso.4
index 4fcf1e4f48b..dfd0efaf4d2 100644
--- a/share/man/man4/iso.4
+++ b/share/man/man4/iso.4
@@ -59,7 +59,7 @@ abstraction through the
 .Tn TP
 protocol
 .Pf ( Tn ISO
-8073), 
+8073),
 for the
 .Dv SOCK_DGRAM
 abstraction through the connectionless transport
@@ -70,14 +70,14 @@ and for the
 .Dv SOCK_RAW
 abstraction
 by providing direct access (for debugging) to the
-.Tn CLNP 
+.Tn CLNP
 .Pf ( Tn ISO
 8473) network layer protocol.
 .Sh ADDRESSING
 .Tn ISO
 addresses are based upon
 .Tn ISO
-8348/AD2, 
+8348/AD2,
 .%T "Addendum to the Network Service Definition Covering Network Layer Addressing."
 .Pp
 Sockets bound to the OSI protocol family use
@@ -136,7 +136,7 @@ domain, this is called a
 .Em transport selector
 (also known at one time as a
 .Em transport suffix ) .
-While ports are always 16 bits, 
+While ports are always 16 bits,
 transport selectors may be
 of (almost) arbitrary size.
 .Pp
@@ -156,11 +156,11 @@ network addresses can take any format.
 .Sh PROTOCOLS
 The
 .Tn ARGO
-1.0 implementation of the 
+1.0 implementation of the
 .Tn ISO
 protocol family comprises
 the Connectionless-Mode Network Protocol
-.Pq Tn CLNP , 
+.Pq Tn CLNP ,
 and the Transport Protocol
 .Pq Tn TP ,
 classes 4 and 0,
diff --git a/share/man/man4/lmc.4 b/share/man/man4/lmc.4
index 5e45cf69dfc..775eb2594c1 100644
--- a/share/man/man4/lmc.4
+++ b/share/man/man4/lmc.4
@@ -72,7 +72,7 @@ Only available if compiled with LMC_DEBUG
 .El
 .Sh SEE ALSO
 .Xr intro 4 ,
-.Xr netintro 4 , 
+.Xr netintro 4 ,
 .Xr sppp 4 ,
 .Xr ifconfig 8
 Lan Media Corporation has a web site with data, descriptions, and pictures
@@ -81,7 +81,7 @@ of their cards at www.lanmedia.com.
 The
 .Nm
 device driver was first released from LMC to support their cards,
-and was later included in NetBSD 1.4. 
+and was later included in NetBSD 1.4.
 .Sh AUTHORS
 The
 .Nm
diff --git a/share/man/man4/man4.alpha/esp.4 b/share/man/man4/man4.alpha/esp.4
index e1c1fa782f0..c289d3bd099 100644
--- a/share/man/man4/man4.alpha/esp.4
+++ b/share/man/man4/man4.alpha/esp.4
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
-.\"	$OpenBSD: esp.4,v 1.2 1998/03/08 00:54:41 johns Exp $
+.\"	$OpenBSD: esp.4,v 1.3 1999/07/09 13:35:44 aaron Exp $
 .\"
-.\" Copyright (c) 1998 The OpenBSD Project 
+.\" Copyright (c) 1998 The OpenBSD Project
 .\" All rights reserved.
 .\"
 .\"
@@ -8,16 +8,16 @@
 .Dt ESP 4 alpha
 .Os
 .Sh NAME
-.Nm esp 
+.Nm esp
 .Nd ESP NCR 53c[f]94 on-board SCSI controller
 .Sh SYNOPSIS
 .Cd "esp0 at tcds? slot ? " Pq "TurboChannel Alpha systems"
 .Cd "esp1 at tcds? slot ? " Pq "TurboChannel Alpha systems"
 .Sh DESCRIPTION
-The 
+The
 .Nm
-is an on-board SCSI controller based on the NCR 53c[f]94 chips, found 
-on DEC 3000/[3456789]00 series Alpha workstations.  
+is an on-board SCSI controller based on the NCR 53c[f]94 chips, found
+on DEC 3000/[3456789]00 series Alpha workstations.
 .Sh BUGS
 Both on-board SCSI chips may or may not work at the same time.
 .Sh SEE ALSO
diff --git a/share/man/man4/man4.alpha/intro.4 b/share/man/man4/man4.alpha/intro.4
index 71ac0e54c47..930ff48d1e2 100644
--- a/share/man/man4/man4.alpha/intro.4
+++ b/share/man/man4/man4.alpha/intro.4
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-.\"     $OpenBSD: intro.4,v 1.3 1999/05/16 19:56:43 alex Exp $
+.\"     $OpenBSD: intro.4,v 1.4 1999/07/09 13:35:44 aaron Exp $
 .\"
 .\" Copyright (c) 1998 The OpenBSD Project
 .\" All Rights Reserved.
@@ -77,13 +77,13 @@ The following Alpha system architectures and models are supported:
 .It AlphaStation 200/250/255/400/500 and AXPpci systems.
 .El
 .Pp
-The DECpc AXP 150 systems (EISA-bus PC-like systems), 
+The DECpc AXP 150 systems (EISA-bus PC-like systems),
 Alpha "server" systems (other than perhaps the AlphaServer 400, which
 might actually be an AlphaStation 400 in disguise), and multiprocessor
 Alpha systems are not supported.
 .Sh HISTORY
 The
 Alpha
-.Nm 
+.Nm
 first appeared with
 .Ox 2.3 .
diff --git a/share/man/man4/man4.alpha/le.4 b/share/man/man4/man4.alpha/le.4
index a38dc718e98..1e5c1972f37 100644
--- a/share/man/man4/man4.alpha/le.4
+++ b/share/man/man4/man4.alpha/le.4
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
-.\"     $OpenBSD: le.4,v 1.3 1999/07/03 02:11:12 aaron Exp $
+.\"     $OpenBSD: le.4,v 1.4 1999/07/09 13:35:44 aaron Exp $
 .\"
-.\" Copyright (c) 1998 The OpenBSD Project 
+.\" Copyright (c) 1998 The OpenBSD Project
 .\" All rights reserved.
 .\"
 .Dd March 7, 1998
@@ -8,12 +8,12 @@
 .Os
 .Sh NAME
 .Nm le
-.Nd Alpha on-board or PCI LANCE ethernet interface 
+.Nd Alpha on-board or PCI LANCE ethernet interface
 .Sh SYNOPSIS
 .Cd "le* at  tc? slot ? offset ? " Pq "TurboChannel Alphas"
 .Cd "le* at pci? dev ? function ?" Pq "PCI LANCE Ethernet (untested)"
 .Sh DESCRIPTION
-The 
+The
 .Nm
 interface provides access to the Ethernet network via the
 .Tn AMD
diff --git a/share/man/man4/man4.alpha/wd.4 b/share/man/man4/man4.alpha/wd.4
index eb56cbca34a..d9f1990581a 100644
--- a/share/man/man4/man4.alpha/wd.4
+++ b/share/man/man4/man4.alpha/wd.4
@@ -9,7 +9,7 @@
 .\"    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
 .\" 2. The name of the author may not be used to endorse or promote products
 .\"    derived from this software without specific prior written permission
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR
 .\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES
 .\" OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED.
@@ -25,7 +25,7 @@
 .Dt WD 4 alpha
 .Os
 .Sh NAME
-.Nm wd 
+.Nm wd
 .Nd WD100x compatible hard disk driver
 .Sh SYNOPSIS
 .Cd "wdc0 at isa? port 0x1f0 irq 14"
@@ -33,7 +33,7 @@
 .Cd "wd* at wdc? drive ?"
 .Sh DESCRIPTION
 The
-.Nm wd 
+.Nm wd
 driver supports hard disk controllers which emulate the Western
 Digital WD100x.  This includes standard MFM, RLL, ESDI and IDE
 controllers.  Most PCI bus alpha machines have a WD100x compatible
diff --git a/share/man/man4/man4.amiga/ae.4 b/share/man/man4/man4.amiga/ae.4
index 95362fb0b1a..81bf5a55322 100644
--- a/share/man/man4/man4.amiga/ae.4
+++ b/share/man/man4/man4.amiga/ae.4
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-.\"   $OpenBSD: ae.4,v 1.6 1999/07/07 10:50:10 aaron Exp $
+.\"   $OpenBSD: ae.4,v 1.7 1999/07/09 13:35:45 aaron Exp $
 .\"	$NetBSD: ae.4,v 1.3 1995/10/07 18:09:11 chopps Exp $
 .\"
 .\" Copyright (c) 1995 Bernd Ernesti and Klaus Burkert. All rights reserved.
@@ -52,7 +52,7 @@
 .Sh SYNOPSIS
 .Cd "ae* at zbus0"
 .Sh DESCRIPTION
-The 
+The
 .Nm
 interface provides access to the 10 Mb/s Ethernet network via the
 .Tn AMD
diff --git a/share/man/man4/man4.amiga/afsc.4 b/share/man/man4/man4.amiga/afsc.4
index 26be597b8be..84e85001c05 100644
--- a/share/man/man4/man4.amiga/afsc.4
+++ b/share/man/man4/man4.amiga/afsc.4
@@ -27,7 +27,7 @@
 .\" (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF
 .\" THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
 .\"
-.\"	$Id: afsc.4,v 1.3 1999/07/07 10:50:10 aaron Exp $
+.\"	$Id: afsc.4,v 1.4 1999/07/09 13:35:44 aaron Exp $
 .\"
 .Dd July 23, 1995
 .Dt AFSC 4 amiga
@@ -41,7 +41,7 @@
 The
 .Tn Amiga
 architecture uses a common machine independent scsi sub-system
-provided in the kernel source.  The machine independent 
+provided in the kernel source.  The machine independent
 drivers that use this code access the hardware through a
 common interface. (see
 .Xr scsibus 4 )
@@ -51,11 +51,11 @@ such as
 which then handles the hardware specific issues.
 .Pp
 The
-.Nm 
+.Nm
 interface handles things such as DMA and interrupts as well as
 actually sending commands, negotiating synchronous or asynchronous
 transfers and handling disconnect/reconnect of SCSI targets.
-The hardware that 
+The hardware that
 .Nm
 uses is based on the NCR53c710 SCSI chip.
 .Sh HARDWARE
@@ -84,6 +84,6 @@ parity error on the SCSI bus.
 .Xr scsibus 4
 .Sh HISTORY
 The
-.Nm 
+.Nm
 interface first appeared in
 .Nx 1.0
diff --git a/share/man/man4/man4.amiga/ahsc.4 b/share/man/man4/man4.amiga/ahsc.4
index c7d5308702c..1c065558cbe 100644
--- a/share/man/man4/man4.amiga/ahsc.4
+++ b/share/man/man4/man4.amiga/ahsc.4
@@ -27,7 +27,7 @@
 .\" (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF
 .\" THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
 .\"
-.\"	$Id: ahsc.4,v 1.4 1999/07/07 10:50:10 aaron Exp $
+.\"	$Id: ahsc.4,v 1.5 1999/07/09 13:35:44 aaron Exp $
 .\"
 .Dd August 31, 1994
 .Dt AHSC 4 amiga
@@ -41,7 +41,7 @@
 The
 .Tn Amiga
 architecture uses a common machine independent scsi sub-system
-provided in the kernel source.  The machine independent 
+provided in the kernel source.  The machine independent
 drivers that use this code access the hardware through a
 common interface. (see
 .Xr scsibus 4 )
@@ -51,11 +51,11 @@ such as
 which then handles the hardware specific issues.
 .Pp
 The
-.Nm 
+.Nm
 interface handles things such as DMA and interrupts as well as
 actually sending commands, negotiating synchronous or asynchronous
 transfers and handling disconnect/reconnect of SCSI targets.
-The hardware that 
+The hardware that
 .Nm
 uses is based on the WD33c93 SCSI chip.
 .Sh DIAGNOSTICS
@@ -89,6 +89,6 @@ expected durring DMA IO setup.
 .Xr scsibus 4
 .Sh HISTORY
 The
-.Nm 
+.Nm
 interface first appeared in
 .Nx 0.9a
diff --git a/share/man/man4/man4.amiga/atzsc.4 b/share/man/man4/man4.amiga/atzsc.4
index 2f6e56a572e..03554b74f94 100644
--- a/share/man/man4/man4.amiga/atzsc.4
+++ b/share/man/man4/man4.amiga/atzsc.4
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-.\"   $OpenBSD: atzsc.4,v 1.5 1999/07/08 01:26:48 aaron Exp $
+.\"   $OpenBSD: atzsc.4,v 1.6 1999/07/09 13:35:45 aaron Exp $
 .\"
 .\" Copyright (c) 1994 Christian E. Hopps
 .\" All rights reserved.
@@ -28,7 +28,7 @@
 .\" (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF
 .\" THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
 .\"
-.\"	$Id: atzsc.4,v 1.5 1999/07/08 01:26:48 aaron Exp $
+.\"	$Id: atzsc.4,v 1.6 1999/07/09 13:35:45 aaron Exp $
 .\"
 .Dd August 31, 1994
 .Dt ATZSC 4 amiga
@@ -42,7 +42,7 @@
 The
 .Tn Amiga
 architecture uses a common machine independent scsi sub-system
-provided in the kernel source.  The machine independent 
+provided in the kernel source.  The machine independent
 drivers that use this code access the hardware through a
 common interface. (see
 .Xr scsibus 4 )
@@ -52,11 +52,11 @@ such as
 which then handles the hardware specific issues.
 .Pp
 The
-.Nm 
+.Nm
 interface handles things such as DMA and interrupts as well as
 actually sending commands, negotiating synchronous or asynchronous
 transfers and handling disconnect/reconnect of SCSI targets.
-The hardware that 
+The hardware that
 .Nm
 uses is based on the WD33c93 SCSI chip.
 .Sh HARDWARE
@@ -94,6 +94,6 @@ expected durring DMA IO setup.
 .Xr scsibus 4
 .Sh HISTORY
 The
-.Nm 
+.Nm
 interface first appeared in
 .Nx 0.9a
diff --git a/share/man/man4/man4.amiga/bah.4 b/share/man/man4/man4.amiga/bah.4
index 99c79e37691..0354ee2e53a 100644
--- a/share/man/man4/man4.amiga/bah.4
+++ b/share/man/man4/man4.amiga/bah.4
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-.\"   $OpenBSD: bah.4,v 1.5 1999/07/07 10:50:10 aaron Exp $
+.\"   $OpenBSD: bah.4,v 1.6 1999/07/09 13:35:45 aaron Exp $
 .\"	$NetBSD: bah.4,v 1.2 1995/06/06 23:41:37 cgd Exp $
 .\"
 .\" Copyright (c) 1995 Ignatios Souvatzis
@@ -41,7 +41,7 @@
 .Sh SYNOPSIS
 .Cd "bah* at zbus0"
 .Sh DESCRIPTION
-The 
+The
 .Nm
 interface provides access to the 2.5 Mb/s ARCnet network via the
 .Tn SMC
@@ -67,12 +67,12 @@ as one option.
 With the IFF_LINK0 flag cleared, IP encoding is done according to the
 deprecated, but popular among Amiga users, RFC 1051 encoding (that
 is, with simple header, packet type 240), and the MTU is 507.
-.Pp 
-With the IFF_LINK0 flag set, IP encoding is done according to RFC 1201 (that 
+.Pp
+With the IFF_LINK0 flag set, IP encoding is done according to RFC 1201 (that
 is, with Packet Header Definition Standard header and packet type 212). The MTU
 is normally 1500.
 .Pp
-When switching between the two modes, do a 
+When switching between the two modes, do a
 .Cd ifconfig interfacename down up
 to switch the mtu.
 .Sh HARDWARE
@@ -90,7 +90,7 @@ Ameristar's arcnet card, manufacturer\ 1053, product\ 9
 .Xr inet 4 ,
 .Xr intro 4 ,
 .Xr ifconfig 8
-.Xr RFC1051 
+.Xr RFC1051
 ,
 .Xr RFC1201
 .br
diff --git a/share/man/man4/man4.amiga/gtsc.4 b/share/man/man4/man4.amiga/gtsc.4
index d200b710af8..2a0b0986727 100644
--- a/share/man/man4/man4.amiga/gtsc.4
+++ b/share/man/man4/man4.amiga/gtsc.4
@@ -27,7 +27,7 @@
 .\" (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF
 .\" THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
 .\"
-.\"	$Id: gtsc.4,v 1.4 1999/07/07 10:50:10 aaron Exp $
+.\"	$Id: gtsc.4,v 1.5 1999/07/09 13:35:45 aaron Exp $
 .\"
 .Dd August 31, 1994
 .Dt GTSC 4 amiga
@@ -41,7 +41,7 @@
 The
 .Tn Amiga
 architecture uses a common machine independent scsi sub-system
-provided in the kernel source.  The machine independent 
+provided in the kernel source.  The machine independent
 drivers that use this code access the hardware through a
 common interface. (see
 .Xr scsibus 4 )
@@ -51,11 +51,11 @@ such as
 which then handles the hardware specific issues.
 .Pp
 The
-.Nm 
+.Nm
 interface handles things such as DMA and interrupts as well as
 actually sending commands, negotiating synchronous or asynchronous
 transfers and handling disconnect/reconnect of SCSI targets.
-The hardware that 
+The hardware that
 .Nm
 uses is based on the WD33c93 SCSI chip.
 .Sh DIAGNOSTICS
@@ -89,6 +89,6 @@ expected durring DMA IO setup.
 .Xr scsibus 4
 .Sh HISTORY
 The
-.Nm 
+.Nm
 interface first appeared in
 .Nx 0.9a
diff --git a/share/man/man4/man4.amiga/ite.4 b/share/man/man4/man4.amiga/ite.4
index ff86a030445..53950a60c16 100644
--- a/share/man/man4/man4.amiga/ite.4
+++ b/share/man/man4/man4.amiga/ite.4
@@ -34,7 +34,7 @@
 .\" SUCH DAMAGE.
 .\"
 .\"     from: @(#)ite.4	5.2 (Berkeley) 3/27/91
-.\"	$Id: ite.4,v 1.2 1996/10/08 01:20:37 michaels Exp $
+.\"	$Id: ite.4,v 1.3 1999/07/09 13:35:45 aaron Exp $
 .\"
 .Dd August 30, 1994
 .Dt ITE 4 amiga
@@ -64,7 +64,7 @@ If more than one of the supported displays exists on a system,
 any or all can be used as
 .Nm
 .Ns s
-with the limitation that only 
+with the limitation that only
 one will have a keyboard (since only one keyboard is supported) and only
 one of each type can be used.
 .Pp
@@ -87,7 +87,7 @@ The keyboard will use the left and right
 keys as meta keys, in that it will set the eighth bit of the character code.
 .Nm Ite
 devices also do a good job at emulating the
-.Sq Li vt100 
+.Sq Li vt100
 .Xr termcap 5
 entry.
 .Pp
@@ -124,7 +124,7 @@ When the graphics application is finished and
 .Pa /dev/grf0
 closed,
 the
-.Nm 
+.Nm
 will be reinitialized with the frame buffer cleared
 and the
 old colormap installed.
diff --git a/share/man/man4/man4.amiga/le.4 b/share/man/man4/man4.amiga/le.4
index 43e93c783e6..1d3eb597170 100644
--- a/share/man/man4/man4.amiga/le.4
+++ b/share/man/man4/man4.amiga/le.4
@@ -35,18 +35,18 @@
 .\"
 .\"	from: Header: le.4,v 1.2 92/10/13 05:31:33 leres Exp
 .\"	from: @(#)le.4	8.1 (Berkeley) 6/9/93
-.\"	$Id: le.4,v 1.3 1999/05/16 19:56:48 alex Exp $
+.\"	$Id: le.4,v 1.4 1999/07/09 13:35:45 aaron Exp $
 .\"
 .Dd August 30, 1994
 .Dt LE 4 amiga
 .Os
 .Sh NAME
 .Nm le
-.Nd Ethernet driver for AMD7990(LANCE)-based boards 
+.Nd Ethernet driver for AMD7990(LANCE)-based boards
 .Sh SYNOPSIS
 .Cd "le* at zbus0"
 .Sh DESCRIPTION
-The 
+The
 .Nm
 interface provides access to the 10 Mb/s Ethernet network via the
 .Tn AMD
diff --git a/share/man/man4/man4.amiga/mgnsc.4 b/share/man/man4/man4.amiga/mgnsc.4
index 714711837ce..fc6d604a61b 100644
--- a/share/man/man4/man4.amiga/mgnsc.4
+++ b/share/man/man4/man4.amiga/mgnsc.4
@@ -27,7 +27,7 @@
 .\" (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF
 .\" THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
 .\"
-.\"	$Id: mgnsc.4,v 1.3 1999/07/07 10:50:10 aaron Exp $
+.\"	$Id: mgnsc.4,v 1.4 1999/07/09 13:35:45 aaron Exp $
 .\"
 .Dd August 31, 1994
 .Dt MGNSC 4 amiga
@@ -41,7 +41,7 @@
 The
 .Tn Amiga
 architecture uses a common machine independent scsi sub-system
-provided in the kernel source.  The machine independent 
+provided in the kernel source.  The machine independent
 drivers that use this code access the hardware through a
 common interface. (see
 .Xr scsibus 4 )
@@ -51,11 +51,11 @@ such as
 which then handles the hardware specific issues.
 .Pp
 The
-.Nm 
+.Nm
 interface handles things such as DMA and interrupts as well as
 actually sending commands, negotiating synchronous or asynchronous
 transfers and handling disconnect/reconnect of SCSI targets.
-The hardware that 
+The hardware that
 .Nm
 uses is based on the NCR53c710 SCSI chip.
 .Sh DIAGNOSTICS
@@ -76,6 +76,6 @@ parity error on the SCSI bus.
 .Xr scsibus 4
 .Sh HISTORY
 The
-.Nm 
+.Nm
 interface first appeared in
 .Nx 0.9a
diff --git a/share/man/man4/man4.amiga/qn.4 b/share/man/man4/man4.amiga/qn.4
index 8698d42346b..83ab13367ef 100644
--- a/share/man/man4/man4.amiga/qn.4
+++ b/share/man/man4/man4.amiga/qn.4
@@ -50,7 +50,7 @@
 .Sh SYNOPSIS
 .Cd "qn* at zbus0"
 .Sh DESCRIPTION
-The 
+The
 .Nm
 interface provides access to the 10 Mb/s Ethernet network via the
 .Tn Fujitsu
diff --git a/share/man/man4/man4.amiga/ser.4 b/share/man/man4/man4.amiga/ser.4
index 5d333bcb625..5b8fa40054c 100644
--- a/share/man/man4/man4.amiga/ser.4
+++ b/share/man/man4/man4.amiga/ser.4
@@ -33,7 +33,7 @@
 .\" SUCH DAMAGE.
 .\"
 .\"     from: @(#)dca.4	5.2 (Berkeley) 3/27/91
-.\"	$Id: ser.4,v 1.2 1996/10/08 01:20:41 michaels Exp $
+.\"	$Id: ser.4,v 1.3 1999/07/09 13:35:45 aaron Exp $
 .\"
 .Dd August 30, 1994
 .Dt SER 4 amiga
@@ -57,7 +57,7 @@ communications interface with a single character buffer.
 Such an interface is built-in to all Amiga machines.
 .Pp
 Input and output for each line may set to one of following baud rates;
-50, 75, 110, 134.5, 150, 300, 600, 1200, 1800, 2400, 4800, 9600, 
+50, 75, 110, 134.5, 150, 300, 600, 1200, 1800, 2400, 4800, 9600,
 19200, 38400, 57600 or 76800.
 .Sh FILES
 .Bl -tag -width Pa
diff --git a/share/man/man4/man4.amiga/wesc.4 b/share/man/man4/man4.amiga/wesc.4
index e1006896e82..2a376b443ae 100644
--- a/share/man/man4/man4.amiga/wesc.4
+++ b/share/man/man4/man4.amiga/wesc.4
@@ -27,7 +27,7 @@
 .\" (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF
 .\" THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
 .\"
-.\"	$Id: wesc.4,v 1.3 1999/07/07 10:50:10 aaron Exp $
+.\"	$Id: wesc.4,v 1.4 1999/07/09 13:35:45 aaron Exp $
 .\"
 .Dd August 31, 1994
 .Dt WESC 4 amiga
@@ -41,7 +41,7 @@
 The
 .Tn Amiga
 architecture uses a common machine independent scsi sub-system
-provided in the kernel source.  The machine independent 
+provided in the kernel source.  The machine independent
 drivers that use this code access the hardware through a
 common interface. (see
 .Xr scsibus 4 )
@@ -51,11 +51,11 @@ such as
 which then handles the hardware specific issues.
 .Pp
 The
-.Nm 
+.Nm
 interface handles things such as DMA and interrupts as well as
 actually sending commands, negotiating synchronous or asynchronous
 transfers and handling disconnect/reconnect of SCSI targets.
-The hardware that 
+The hardware that
 .Nm
 uses is based on the NCR53c710 SCSI chip.
 .Sh HARDWARE
@@ -84,6 +84,6 @@ parity error on the SCSI bus.
 .Xr scsibus 4
 .Sh HISTORY
 The
-.Nm 
+.Nm
 interface first appeared in
 .Nx 0.9a
diff --git a/share/man/man4/man4.amiga/zssc.4 b/share/man/man4/man4.amiga/zssc.4
index c8f0c210661..45017656515 100644
--- a/share/man/man4/man4.amiga/zssc.4
+++ b/share/man/man4/man4.amiga/zssc.4
@@ -27,7 +27,7 @@
 .\" (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF
 .\" THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
 .\"
-.\"	$Id: zssc.4,v 1.3 1999/07/07 10:50:10 aaron Exp $
+.\"	$Id: zssc.4,v 1.4 1999/07/09 13:35:45 aaron Exp $
 .\"
 .Dd August 31, 1994
 .Dt ZSSC 4 amiga
@@ -41,7 +41,7 @@
 The
 .Tn Amiga
 architecture uses a common machine independent scsi sub-system
-provided in the kernel source.  The machine independent 
+provided in the kernel source.  The machine independent
 drivers that use this code access the hardware through a
 common interface. (see
 .Xr scsibus 4 )
@@ -51,11 +51,11 @@ such as
 which then handles the hardware specific issues.
 .Pp
 The
-.Nm 
+.Nm
 interface handles things such as DMA and interrupts as well as
 actually sending commands, negotiating synchronous or asynchronous
 transfers and handling disconnect/reconnect of SCSI targets.
-The hardware that 
+The hardware that
 .Nm
 uses is based on the NCR53c710 SCSI chip.
 .Sh DIAGNOSTICS
@@ -76,6 +76,6 @@ parity error on the SCSI bus.
 .Xr scsibus 4
 .Sh HISTORY
 The
-.Nm 
+.Nm
 interface first appeared in
 .Nx 0.9a
diff --git a/share/man/man4/man4.arc/intro.4 b/share/man/man4/man4.arc/intro.4
index d085a3912e7..068af0fbb40 100644
--- a/share/man/man4/man4.arc/intro.4
+++ b/share/man/man4/man4.arc/intro.4
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-.\"     $OpenBSD: intro.4,v 1.2 1999/05/16 19:56:49 alex Exp $
+.\"     $OpenBSD: intro.4,v 1.3 1999/07/09 13:35:45 aaron Exp $
 .\"
 .\" Copyright (c) 1998 The OpenBSD Project
 .\" All Rights Reserved.
@@ -92,6 +92,6 @@ that were made are also not supported.
 .Sh HISTORY
 The
 Arc
-.Nm 
+.Nm
 first appeared with
 .Ox 2.0 .
diff --git a/share/man/man4/man4.arc/joy.4 b/share/man/man4/man4.arc/joy.4
index 4383cd2760a..653ac37947e 100644
--- a/share/man/man4/man4.arc/joy.4
+++ b/share/man/man4/man4.arc/joy.4
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-.\"	$OpenBSD: joy.4,v 1.2 1999/04/02 16:21:37 aaron Exp $
+.\"	$OpenBSD: joy.4,v 1.3 1999/07/09 13:35:45 aaron Exp $
 .\"
 .\" Copyright (c) 1996 Matthieu Herrb
 .\" All rights reserved.
@@ -77,8 +77,8 @@ Returns the current Y offset.
 .Pp
 All this commands take an integer parameter.
 .Pp
-Read() on the file descriptor returns a 
-.Fa joystick 
+Read() on the file descriptor returns a
+.Fa joystick
 structure:
 .Bd -literal -offset indent
 struct joystick {
diff --git a/share/man/man4/man4.arc/le.4 b/share/man/man4/man4.arc/le.4
index e7607c6f898..367766bccb3 100644
--- a/share/man/man4/man4.arc/le.4
+++ b/share/man/man4/man4.arc/le.4
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
-.\"     $OpenBSD: le.4,v 1.3 1999/07/03 02:11:13 aaron Exp $
+.\"     $OpenBSD: le.4,v 1.4 1999/07/09 13:35:45 aaron Exp $
 .\"
-.\" Copyright (c) 1998 The OpenBSD Project 
+.\" Copyright (c) 1998 The OpenBSD Project
 .\" All rights reserved.
 .\"
 .Dd March 7, 1998
@@ -8,12 +8,12 @@
 .Os
 .Sh NAME
 .Nm le
-.Nd Alpha on-board or PCI LANCE ethernet interface 
+.Nd Alpha on-board or PCI LANCE ethernet interface
 .Sh SYNOPSIS
 .Cd "le* at  tc? slot ? offset ? " Pq "TurboChannel Alphas"
 .Cd "le* at pci? dev ? function ?" Pq "PCI LANCE Ethernet (untested)"
 .Sh DESCRIPTION
-The 
+The
 .Nm
 interface provides access to the Ethernet network via the
 .Tn AMD
diff --git a/share/man/man4/man4.arc/wd.4 b/share/man/man4/man4.arc/wd.4
index eb56cbca34a..d9f1990581a 100644
--- a/share/man/man4/man4.arc/wd.4
+++ b/share/man/man4/man4.arc/wd.4
@@ -9,7 +9,7 @@
 .\"    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
 .\" 2. The name of the author may not be used to endorse or promote products
 .\"    derived from this software without specific prior written permission
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR
 .\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES
 .\" OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED.
@@ -25,7 +25,7 @@
 .Dt WD 4 alpha
 .Os
 .Sh NAME
-.Nm wd 
+.Nm wd
 .Nd WD100x compatible hard disk driver
 .Sh SYNOPSIS
 .Cd "wdc0 at isa? port 0x1f0 irq 14"
@@ -33,7 +33,7 @@
 .Cd "wd* at wdc? drive ?"
 .Sh DESCRIPTION
 The
-.Nm wd 
+.Nm wd
 driver supports hard disk controllers which emulate the Western
 Digital WD100x.  This includes standard MFM, RLL, ESDI and IDE
 controllers.  Most PCI bus alpha machines have a WD100x compatible
diff --git a/share/man/man4/man4.arm32/wd.4 b/share/man/man4/man4.arm32/wd.4
index df2ae30c3c2..739e662c5a1 100644
--- a/share/man/man4/man4.arm32/wd.4
+++ b/share/man/man4/man4.arm32/wd.4
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-.\"	$OpenBSD: wd.4,v 1.2 1996/10/08 01:20:44 michaels Exp $
+.\"	$OpenBSD: wd.4,v 1.3 1999/07/09 13:35:45 aaron Exp $
 .\"
 .\" Copyright (c) 1995 Mark Brinicombe
 .\" Based on man4.i386/wd.4 by James A. Jegers
@@ -11,7 +11,7 @@
 .\"    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
 .\" 2. The name of the author may not be used to endorse or promote products
 .\"    derived from this software without specific prior written permission
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR
 .\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES
 .\" OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED.
@@ -23,18 +23,18 @@
 .\" (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF
 .\" THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
 .\"
-.Dd July 29th, 1995 
+.Dd July 29th, 1995
 .Dt WD 4 arm32
 .Os
 .Sh NAME
-.Nm wd 
+.Nm wd
 .Nd WD100x compatible hard disk driver
 .Sh SYNOPSIS
 .Cd "wdc0 at mainbus? base 0x002107c0"
 .Cd "wd* at wdc? drive ?"
 .Sh DESCRIPTION
 The
-.Nm wd 
+.Nm wd
 driver supports hard disk controllers which emulate the Western
 Digital WD100x.  This includes standard MFM, RLL, ESDI and IDE
 controllers.
diff --git a/share/man/man4/man4.hp300/dcl.4 b/share/man/man4/man4.hp300/dcl.4
index 42da0b6c298..a2a205f3556 100644
--- a/share/man/man4/man4.hp300/dcl.4
+++ b/share/man/man4/man4.hp300/dcl.4
@@ -33,7 +33,7 @@
 .\" SUCH DAMAGE.
 .\"
 .\"     from: @(#)dcl.4	5.2 (Berkeley) 3/27/91
-.\"	$Id: dcl.4,v 1.2 1998/09/07 16:44:36 aaron Exp $
+.\"	$Id: dcl.4,v 1.3 1999/07/09 13:35:46 aaron Exp $
 .\"
 .Dd March 27, 1991
 .Dt DCL 4 hp300
@@ -119,7 +119,7 @@ The
 driver
 .Ud
 .Sh BUGS
-Breaks received at a faster rate then 1 break every second will be 
+Breaks received at a faster rate then 1 break every second will be
 recognized as a single break.
 .Pp
 Console use is not supported.
diff --git a/share/man/man4/man4.hp300/dcm.4 b/share/man/man4/man4.hp300/dcm.4
index 291dd44e90d..cfc1bf2348c 100644
--- a/share/man/man4/man4.hp300/dcm.4
+++ b/share/man/man4/man4.hp300/dcm.4
@@ -33,7 +33,7 @@
 .\" SUCH DAMAGE.
 .\"
 .\"     from: @(#)dcm.4	5.2 (Berkeley) 3/27/91
-.\"	$Id: dcm.4,v 1.1 1995/10/18 08:44:27 deraadt Exp $
+.\"	$Id: dcm.4,v 1.2 1999/07/09 13:35:46 aaron Exp $
 .\"
 .Dd March 27, 1991
 .Dt DCM 4 hp300
@@ -75,7 +75,7 @@ Each port on the
 has a 128 byte input silo and a 16 byte output silo.
 Interrupts happen on a per character basis unless the interrupt
 rate for the card reaches 70 interrupts per second at which time the
-driver changes to a 16.7ms (60 interrupts per second) polling scheme until 
+driver changes to a 16.7ms (60 interrupts per second) polling scheme until
 the interrupt rate drops.
 .Sh FILES
 .Bl -tag -width /dev/tty0[0-9a-f] -compact
diff --git a/share/man/man4/man4.hp300/hil.4 b/share/man/man4/man4.hp300/hil.4
index ff60307d48c..d951b24ed6b 100644
--- a/share/man/man4/man4.hp300/hil.4
+++ b/share/man/man4/man4.hp300/hil.4
@@ -34,7 +34,7 @@
 .\" SUCH DAMAGE.
 .\"
 .\"     from: @(#)hil.4	5.2 (Berkeley) 3/27/91
-.\"	$Id: hil.4,v 1.1 1995/10/18 08:44:28 deraadt Exp $
+.\"	$Id: hil.4,v 1.2 1999/07/09 13:35:46 aaron Exp $
 .\"
 .Dd March 27, 1991
 .Dt HIL 4 hp300
@@ -49,7 +49,7 @@ is the interface used by the Series
 300 computers to connect devices such as keyboards, mice, control knobs,
 and
 .Tn ID
-modules to the machine. 
+modules to the machine.
 .Pp
 Special files
 .Pa /dev/hil[1-7]
diff --git a/share/man/man4/man4.hp300/st.4 b/share/man/man4/man4.hp300/st.4
index a0b634ec2cf..8efa564204f 100644
--- a/share/man/man4/man4.hp300/st.4
+++ b/share/man/man4/man4.hp300/st.4
@@ -34,7 +34,7 @@
 .\" SUCH DAMAGE.
 .\"
 .\"     from: @(#)st.4	5.3 (Berkeley) 7/31/91
-.\"	$Id: st.4,v 1.3 1999/07/03 02:11:13 aaron Exp $
+.\"	$Id: st.4,v 1.4 1999/07/09 13:35:46 aaron Exp $
 .\"
 .Dd July 31, 1991
 .Dt ST 4 hp300
@@ -51,7 +51,7 @@ The
 .Nm
 driver was written especially to support the Exabyte
 .Tn EXB-8200 8MM
-Cartridge 
+Cartridge
 Tape Subsystem.  It has several extensions specific to the Exabyte,
 but should support other tape drives as long has they follow
 the
@@ -63,7 +63,7 @@ Archive
 tape drive.
 The
 .Nm
-tape interface provides a standard tape drive interface 
+tape interface provides a standard tape drive interface
 as described in
 .Xr mtio 4
 with the following exceptions:
diff --git a/share/man/man4/man4.hp300/tc.4 b/share/man/man4/man4.hp300/tc.4
index 040f3ba2a9d..baaa0ad3e3b 100644
--- a/share/man/man4/man4.hp300/tc.4
+++ b/share/man/man4/man4.hp300/tc.4
@@ -34,7 +34,7 @@
 .\" SUCH DAMAGE.
 .\"
 .\"     from: @(#)tc.4	5.2 (Berkeley) 3/27/91
-.\"	$Id: tc.4,v 1.1 1995/10/18 08:44:28 deraadt Exp $
+.\"	$Id: tc.4,v 1.2 1999/07/09 13:35:46 aaron Exp $
 .\"
 .Dd March 27, 1991
 .Dt TC 4 hp300
@@ -67,7 +67,7 @@ series 300
 Terminal Emulator) defaults.  The device can also be used as a graphics output
 device.
 .Pp
-The 
+The
 .Xr ioctl 2
 calls supported by the
 .Bx
@@ -120,7 +120,7 @@ For more examples of the details on the behavior of the device, see the device
 dependent source files for the X Window System, in the
 .Pa /usr/src/new/X/libhp
 directory.
-.Bd -literal 
+.Bd -literal
 struct tcboxfb *tc;
 u_char *Addr, frame_buffer;
 struct grfinfo gi;
diff --git a/share/man/man4/man4.i386/ahb.4 b/share/man/man4/man4.i386/ahb.4
index e144e1b53c9..82810e12320 100644
--- a/share/man/man4/man4.i386/ahb.4
+++ b/share/man/man4/man4.i386/ahb.4
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-.\"	$OpenBSD: ahb.4,v 1.6 1999/06/05 13:18:35 aaron Exp $
+.\"	$OpenBSD: ahb.4,v 1.7 1999/07/09 13:35:43 aaron Exp $
 .\"
 .\" Copyright (c) 1994 James A. Jegers
 .\" All rights reserved.
@@ -10,7 +10,7 @@
 .\"    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
 .\" 2. The name of the author may not be used to endorse or promote products
 .\"    derived from this software without specific prior written permission
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR
 .\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES
 .\" OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED.
diff --git a/share/man/man4/man4.i386/apm.4 b/share/man/man4/man4.i386/apm.4
index 5b99465eac4..76d57edd4d9 100644
--- a/share/man/man4/man4.i386/apm.4
+++ b/share/man/man4/man4.i386/apm.4
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-.\"	$OpenBSD: apm.4,v 1.4 1999/05/16 19:57:02 alex Exp $
+.\"	$OpenBSD: apm.4,v 1.5 1999/07/09 13:35:43 aaron Exp $
 .\"
 .\"	Copyright (c) 1998 Marco S. Hyman
 .\"
@@ -107,7 +107,7 @@ External power state unknown.
 .El
 .Pp
 The
-.Va battery_life 
+.Va battery_life
 value contains the estimated percentage of battery life available.
 100% indicates a full charge.
 .Pp
diff --git a/share/man/man4/man4.i386/aria.4 b/share/man/man4/man4.i386/aria.4
index 1bacd0ed6df..769b842d68b 100644
--- a/share/man/man4/man4.i386/aria.4
+++ b/share/man/man4/man4.i386/aria.4
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-.\"	$OpenBSD: aria.4,v 1.4 1999/06/05 13:18:35 aaron Exp $
+.\"	$OpenBSD: aria.4,v 1.5 1999/07/09 13:35:43 aaron Exp $
 .\"	aria.4
 .\" Copyright (c) 1996 Roland C. Dowdeswell
 .\" All rights reserved.
@@ -28,7 +28,7 @@
 .\" STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN
 .\" ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE
 .\" POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
-.\"	
+.\"
 .\"
 .Dd January 21, 1996
 .Dt ARIA 4 i386
diff --git a/share/man/man4/man4.i386/ast.4 b/share/man/man4/man4.i386/ast.4
index 0cf87371826..81f06e309c2 100644
--- a/share/man/man4/man4.i386/ast.4
+++ b/share/man/man4/man4.i386/ast.4
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-.\"	$OpenBSD: ast.4,v 1.4 1996/08/29 12:15:13 deraadt Exp $
+.\"	$OpenBSD: ast.4,v 1.5 1999/07/09 13:35:43 aaron Exp $
 .\"	$NetBSD: ast.4,v 1.7 1996/03/16 00:07:07 thorpej Exp $
 .\"
 .\" Copyright (c) 1990, 1991 The Regents of the University of California.
@@ -62,7 +62,7 @@ using this multiplexing protocol was AST.
 .Pp
 Each
 .Nm
-device is the master device for up to four 
+device is the master device for up to four
 .Nm com
 devices.  The kernel configuration specifies these
 .Nm com
diff --git a/share/man/man4/man4.i386/bktr.4 b/share/man/man4/man4.i386/bktr.4
index 18c1cfc1893..b9ba836ffd9 100644
--- a/share/man/man4/man4.i386/bktr.4
+++ b/share/man/man4/man4.i386/bktr.4
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 .\"
-.\"	$OpenBSD: bktr.4,v 1.2 1999/07/03 02:11:13 aaron Exp $
+.\"	$OpenBSD: bktr.4,v 1.3 1999/07/09 13:35:43 aaron Exp $
 .\"	$FreeBSD: bktr.4,v 1.1 1998/03/09 10:56:22 jkh Exp $
 .\"
 .Dd January 28, 1998
@@ -22,7 +22,7 @@ the Matrox Meteor driver.  The bktr driver should support most video cards
 based on the
 .Em Brooktree Bt848 Video Capture Chip.
 .Pp
-Specifically, the following cards are known to work: 
+Specifically, the following cards are known to work:
 .br
 .Em Hauppage Wincast TV
 .br
diff --git a/share/man/man4/man4.i386/boca.4 b/share/man/man4/man4.i386/boca.4
index 60d38b9eda4..94f65fd4d7e 100644
--- a/share/man/man4/man4.i386/boca.4
+++ b/share/man/man4/man4.i386/boca.4
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-.\"	$OpenBSD: boca.4,v 1.5 1999/04/02 16:21:37 aaron Exp $
+.\"	$OpenBSD: boca.4,v 1.6 1999/07/09 13:35:43 aaron Exp $
 .\"
 .\" Copyright (c) 1990, 1991 The Regents of the University of California.
 .\" All rights reserved.
@@ -76,7 +76,7 @@ communications interfaces.
 .Pp
 Each
 .Nm
-device is the master device for up to eight 
+device is the master device for up to eight
 .Nm com
 devices.  The kernel configuration specifies these
 .Nm com
diff --git a/share/man/man4/man4.i386/fdc.4 b/share/man/man4/man4.i386/fdc.4
index ae98c0bf8f4..f0bc8dde49c 100644
--- a/share/man/man4/man4.i386/fdc.4
+++ b/share/man/man4/man4.i386/fdc.4
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-.\"	$OpenBSD: fdc.4,v 1.9 1998/09/01 16:38:22 deraadt Exp $
+.\"	$OpenBSD: fdc.4,v 1.10 1999/07/09 13:35:43 aaron Exp $
 .\"	$NetBSD: fdc.4,v 1.6 1996/03/22 01:55:14 andrew Exp $
 .\"
 .\" Copyright (c) 1996 Andrew C. Wheadon
@@ -47,7 +47,7 @@
 .Sh DESCRIPTION
 The
 .Nm fdc
-driver supports the standard AT floppy 
+driver supports the standard AT floppy
 disk controllers. These include standard IDE, MFM, RLL,
 EIDE, ESDI and SCSI controllers with floppy attachment.
 .Pp
@@ -97,11 +97,11 @@ If the 0x20 bit is on, the drive will be attached even
 if it was not found by the probe routine.
 .Sh BUGS
 The
-.Nm fdc 
+.Nm fdc
 driver can interfere with other controllers, namely some WD/SMC
 network controllers fail to work when the probing mechanism
-in the 
-.Nm fdc 
+in the
+.Nm fdc
 driver probes for a missing second floppy drive.
 In this case you should try recompiling the kernel
 replacing the relevant line with
diff --git a/share/man/man4/man4.i386/ie.4 b/share/man/man4/man4.i386/ie.4
index 6475884f051..a70a89777db 100644
--- a/share/man/man4/man4.i386/ie.4
+++ b/share/man/man4/man4.i386/ie.4
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-.\"	$OpenBSD: ie.4,v 1.5 1999/05/27 18:42:30 aaron Exp $
+.\"	$OpenBSD: ie.4,v 1.6 1999/07/09 13:35:43 aaron Exp $
 .\"
 .\" Copyright (c) 1994 James A. Jegers
 .\" All rights reserved.
@@ -10,7 +10,7 @@
 .\"    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
 .\" 2. The name of the author may not be used to endorse or promote products
 .\"    derived from this software without specific prior written permission
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR
 .\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES
 .\" OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED.
@@ -26,7 +26,7 @@
 .Dt IE 4 i386
 .Os
 .Sh NAME
-.Nm ie 
+.Nm ie
 .Nd Intel 82586 chip Ethernet device driver
 .Sh SYNOPSIS
 .Cd "ie0 at isa? port 0x360 irq 7 iomem 0xd0000"
diff --git a/share/man/man4/man4.i386/intro.4 b/share/man/man4/man4.i386/intro.4
index a755b0d8275..80b1a89fb96 100644
--- a/share/man/man4/man4.i386/intro.4
+++ b/share/man/man4/man4.i386/intro.4
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-.\"	$OpenBSD: intro.4,v 1.9 1999/07/02 20:11:51 aaron Exp $
+.\"	$OpenBSD: intro.4,v 1.10 1999/07/09 13:35:43 aaron Exp $
 .\"
 .\" Copyright (c) 1994 Christopher G. Demetriou
 .\" All rights reserved.
@@ -113,9 +113,9 @@ Adaptec AIC-6260, Adaptec AIC-6360, Adaptec 152x, and SoundBlaster SCSI boards.
 .It apm
 advanced power management device interface.
 .It aria
-Sierra Semiconductor Aria 16 sound cards 
+Sierra Semiconductor Aria 16 sound cards
 .It ast
-multiplexing serial communications card first made by AST. 
+multiplexing serial communications card first made by AST.
 .It bktr
 Brooktree video capture driver
 .It boca
diff --git a/share/man/man4/man4.i386/iy.4 b/share/man/man4/man4.i386/iy.4
index f7aea5e561e..88d0d5f815c 100644
--- a/share/man/man4/man4.i386/iy.4
+++ b/share/man/man4/man4.i386/iy.4
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-.\"	$OpenBSD: iy.4,v 1.5 1999/05/16 19:57:05 alex Exp $
+.\"	$OpenBSD: iy.4,v 1.6 1999/07/09 13:35:43 aaron Exp $
 .\"	$NetBSD: iy.4,v 1.2 1996/05/23 16:52:39 thorpej Exp $
 .\"
 .\" Copyright (c) 1994 Herb Peyerl
@@ -55,7 +55,7 @@ BNC, also known as thin-net
 UTP, also known as twisted pair
 .El
 .Pp
-The default port to use is the port the card autodetects at 
+The default port to use is the port the card autodetects at
 .Xr ifconfig up
 time. To choose an alternate port,
 use the following flag combinations with
diff --git a/share/man/man4/man4.i386/joy.4 b/share/man/man4/man4.i386/joy.4
index e6c8206805f..58220a143ac 100644
--- a/share/man/man4/man4.i386/joy.4
+++ b/share/man/man4/man4.i386/joy.4
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-.\"	$OpenBSD: joy.4,v 1.6 1999/04/02 16:21:37 aaron Exp $
+.\"	$OpenBSD: joy.4,v 1.7 1999/07/09 13:35:43 aaron Exp $
 .\"
 .\" Copyright (c) 1996 Matthieu Herrb
 .\" All rights reserved.
@@ -78,8 +78,8 @@ Returns the current Y offset.
 .Pp
 All of these commands take an integer parameter.
 .Pp
-Read() on the file descriptor returns a 
-.Fa joystick 
+Read() on the file descriptor returns a
+.Fa joystick
 structure:
 .Bd -literal -offset indent
 struct joystick {
diff --git a/share/man/man4/man4.i386/le.4 b/share/man/man4/man4.i386/le.4
index dd1cbace283..1811bdc8160 100644
--- a/share/man/man4/man4.i386/le.4
+++ b/share/man/man4/man4.i386/le.4
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-.\"	$OpenBSD: le.4,v 1.3 1999/05/16 19:57:05 alex Exp $
+.\"	$OpenBSD: le.4,v 1.4 1999/07/09 13:35:44 aaron Exp $
 .\"
 .\" Copyright (c) 1994 James A. Jegers
 .\" All rights reserved.
@@ -10,7 +10,7 @@
 .\"    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
 .\" 2. The name of the author may not be used to endorse or promote products
 .\"    derived from this software without specific prior written permission
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR
 .\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES
 .\" OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED.
@@ -26,7 +26,7 @@
 .Dt LE 4 i386
 .Os
 .Sh NAME
-.Nm le 
+.Nm le
 .Nd Ethernet driver for Lance based Ethernet boards
 .Sh SYNOPSIS
 .Cd "le0 at isa? port 0x320 irq 10 drq 7"
@@ -40,7 +40,7 @@ Lance Ethernet chips.  The Ethernet cards supported by the
 interface are:
 .Pp
 .Bl -tag -width -offset indet -compact
-.It BICC Isolan 
+.It BICC Isolan
 .It Novell NE2100
 .It Digital DEPCA
 .El
diff --git a/share/man/man4/man4.i386/mcd.4 b/share/man/man4/man4.i386/mcd.4
index 48409adf42c..4c7e6047614 100644
--- a/share/man/man4/man4.i386/mcd.4
+++ b/share/man/man4/man4.i386/mcd.4
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-.\"	$OpenBSD: mcd.4,v 1.4 1999/06/05 13:18:35 aaron Exp $
+.\"	$OpenBSD: mcd.4,v 1.5 1999/07/09 13:35:44 aaron Exp $
 .\"
 .\" Copyright (c) 1994 James A. Jegers
 .\" All rights reserved.
@@ -10,7 +10,7 @@
 .\"    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
 .\" 2. The name of the author may not be used to endorse or promote products
 .\"    derived from this software without specific prior written permission
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR
 .\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES
 .\" OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED.
diff --git a/share/man/man4/man4.i386/rtfps.4 b/share/man/man4/man4.i386/rtfps.4
index 26683346e79..868076fd462 100644
--- a/share/man/man4/man4.i386/rtfps.4
+++ b/share/man/man4/man4.i386/rtfps.4
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-.\"	$OpenBSD: rtfps.4,v 1.4 1998/07/12 09:55:32 downsj Exp $
+.\"	$OpenBSD: rtfps.4,v 1.5 1999/07/09 13:35:44 aaron Exp $
 .\"
 .\" Copyright (c) 1990, 1991 The Regents of the University of California.
 .\" All rights reserved.
@@ -61,7 +61,7 @@ communications interfaces.
 .Pp
 Each
 .Nm
-device is the master device for up to four 
+device is the master device for up to four
 .Nm com
 devices.  The kernel configuration specifies these
 .Nm com
diff --git a/share/man/man4/man4.i386/scd.4 b/share/man/man4/man4.i386/scd.4
index 34079247064..ba0913f2510 100644
--- a/share/man/man4/man4.i386/scd.4
+++ b/share/man/man4/man4.i386/scd.4
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 .\"
-.\" $OpenBSD: scd.4,v 1.2 1996/08/08 17:11:30 deraadt Exp $
+.\" $OpenBSD: scd.4,v 1.3 1999/07/09 13:35:44 aaron Exp $
 .\"
 .\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
 .\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
@@ -8,7 +8,7 @@
 .\"    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
 .\" 2. The name of the author may not be used to endorse or promote products
 .\"    derived from this software without specific prior written permission
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR
 .\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES
 .\" OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED.
@@ -31,7 +31,7 @@
 .Cd "scd0 at isa? port 0x340"
 .Sh DESCRIPTION
 The
-.Nm scd 
+.Nm scd
 driver provides support for Sony CD-ROM drives and controllers.
 Supported drives are CDU-31A and CDU-33A.
 .Pp
diff --git a/share/man/man4/man4.i386/sea.4 b/share/man/man4/man4.i386/sea.4
index 694fc8911e4..c5573b15456 100644
--- a/share/man/man4/man4.i386/sea.4
+++ b/share/man/man4/man4.i386/sea.4
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-.\"	$OpenBSD: sea.4,v 1.5 1999/06/05 13:18:35 aaron Exp $
+.\"	$OpenBSD: sea.4,v 1.6 1999/07/09 13:35:44 aaron Exp $
 .\"
 .\" Copyright (c) 1994 James A. Jegers
 .\" All rights reserved.
@@ -10,7 +10,7 @@
 .\"    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
 .\" 2. The name of the author may not be used to endorse or promote products
 .\"    derived from this software without specific prior written permission
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR
 .\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES
 .\" OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED.
diff --git a/share/man/man4/man4.i386/speaker.4 b/share/man/man4/man4.i386/speaker.4
index cd268b45b37..449e6b2c808 100644
--- a/share/man/man4/man4.i386/speaker.4
+++ b/share/man/man4/man4.i386/speaker.4
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-.\"	$OpenBSD: speaker.4,v 1.6 1999/01/07 22:32:58 niklas Exp $
+.\"	$OpenBSD: speaker.4,v 1.7 1999/07/09 13:35:44 aaron Exp $
 .\"	$NetBSD: speaker.4,v 1.9 1998/08/18 08:16:56 augustss Exp $
 .\"
 .\" Copyright (c) 1993 Christopher G. Demetriou
@@ -66,7 +66,7 @@ continuous sequence; this array must be terminated by a final member with
 a zero duration.
 .Pp
 The play-string language is modelled on the PLAY statement conventions of
-IBM BASIC 2.0. The MB, MF and X primitives of PLAY are not useful in a UNIX 
+IBM BASIC 2.0. The MB, MF and X primitives of PLAY are not useful in a UNIX
 environment and are omitted. The `octave-tracking' feature is also new.
 .Pp
 There are 84 accessible notes numbered 1-83 in 7 octaves, each running from
@@ -109,22 +109,22 @@ T <n> -- Sets the number of quarter notes per minute; default is 120. Musical
 names for common tempi are:
 .Bl -column Description Tempo BPM -offset indent
 .Em 	Tempo		Beats per Minute
-very slow	Larghissimo	
+very slow	Larghissimo
         	Largo	 	40-60
          	Larghetto	60-66
-        	Grave       	
-        	Lento       	
+        	Grave
+        	Lento
         	Adagio	 	66-76
-slow    	Adagietto    	
+slow    	Adagietto
         	Andante	 	76-108
-medium   	Andantino	
+medium   	Andantino
         	Moderato 	108-120
-fast    	Allegretto	
+fast    	Allegretto
         	Allegro	 	120-168
-        	Vivace    	
-        	Veloce    	
+        	Vivace
+        	Veloce
         	Presto	 	168-208
-very fast	Prestissimo	
+very fast	Prestissimo
 .El
 .Pp
 M[LNS] -- set articulation. MN (N for normal) is the default; the last 1/8th of
@@ -134,7 +134,7 @@ MS (staccato) 1/4 rest space.
 Notes (that is, CDEFGAB or N command character groups) may be followed by
 sustain dots. Each dot causes the note's value to be lengthened by one-half
 for each one. Thus, a note dotted once is held for 3/2 of its undotted value;
-dotted twice, it is held 9/4, and three times would give 27/8. 
+dotted twice, it is held 9/4, and three times would give 27/8.
 .Pp
 Whitespace in play strings is simply skipped and may be used to separate
 melody sections.
diff --git a/share/man/man4/man4.i386/uha.4 b/share/man/man4/man4.i386/uha.4
index 140eafc9ff8..c839e6a0ec0 100644
--- a/share/man/man4/man4.i386/uha.4
+++ b/share/man/man4/man4.i386/uha.4
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-.\"	$OpenBSD: uha.4,v 1.5 1999/06/05 13:18:35 aaron Exp $
+.\"	$OpenBSD: uha.4,v 1.6 1999/07/09 13:35:44 aaron Exp $
 .\"
 .\" Copyright (c) 1994 James A. Jegers
 .\" All rights reserved.
@@ -10,7 +10,7 @@
 .\"    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
 .\" 2. The name of the author may not be used to endorse or promote products
 .\"    derived from this software without specific prior written permission
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR
 .\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES
 .\" OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED.
diff --git a/share/man/man4/man4.i386/wdc.4 b/share/man/man4/man4.i386/wdc.4
index 93615e76b99..f1f403a53e9 100644
--- a/share/man/man4/man4.i386/wdc.4
+++ b/share/man/man4/man4.i386/wdc.4
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-.\"	$OpenBSD: wdc.4,v 1.5 1999/06/05 13:18:35 aaron Exp $
+.\"	$OpenBSD: wdc.4,v 1.6 1999/07/09 13:35:44 aaron Exp $
 .\"
 .\" Copyright (c) 1994 James A. Jegers
 .\" All rights reserved.
@@ -10,7 +10,7 @@
 .\"    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
 .\" 2. The name of the author may not be used to endorse or promote products
 .\"    derived from this software without specific prior written permission
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR
 .\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES
 .\" OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED.
diff --git a/share/man/man4/man4.i386/wss.4 b/share/man/man4/man4.i386/wss.4
index a31613e66dd..2feed1e43eb 100644
--- a/share/man/man4/man4.i386/wss.4
+++ b/share/man/man4/man4.i386/wss.4
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-.\"   $OpenBSD: wss.4,v 1.5 1999/07/06 19:27:37 deraadt Exp $
+.\"   $OpenBSD: wss.4,v 1.6 1999/07/09 13:35:44 aaron Exp $
 .\"   $NetBSD: wss.4,v 1.8 1998/01/19 20:22:30 augustss Exp $
 .\"
 .\" Copyright (c) 1995 Michael Long.
@@ -55,7 +55,7 @@ The configuration file must have bit 1 set in
 to enable the MAD16 support.  This is to avoid potential
 conflicts with other devices when probing the MAD16 because it requires
 use of extra I/O ports not in the base port range.
-Bit 2 in 
+Bit 2 in
 .Cm flags
 disables the joystick port on MAD16 hardware.
 .Sh BUGS
diff --git a/share/man/man4/man4.i386/wt.4 b/share/man/man4/man4.i386/wt.4
index e9de452e4e2..1477f50ecb7 100644
--- a/share/man/man4/man4.i386/wt.4
+++ b/share/man/man4/man4.i386/wt.4
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-.\"	$OpenBSD: wt.4,v 1.4 1999/06/05 13:18:36 aaron Exp $
+.\"	$OpenBSD: wt.4,v 1.5 1999/07/09 13:35:44 aaron Exp $
 .\"
 .\" Copyright (c) 1994 James A. Jegers
 .\" All rights reserved.
@@ -10,7 +10,7 @@
 .\"    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
 .\" 2. The name of the author may not be used to endorse or promote products
 .\"    derived from this software without specific prior written permission
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR
 .\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES
 .\" OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED.
@@ -37,8 +37,8 @@ The
 driver provides support for the following Archive and Wangtek boards:
 .Pp
 .Bl -tag -width -offset indent -compact
-.It QIC-02 
-.It QIC-36 
+.It QIC-02
+.It QIC-36
 .El
 .Pp
 .Sh SEE ALSO
diff --git a/share/man/man4/man4.i386/xf86.4 b/share/man/man4/man4.i386/xf86.4
index b3bbfbe2d25..9752f537b2f 100644
--- a/share/man/man4/man4.i386/xf86.4
+++ b/share/man/man4/man4.i386/xf86.4
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-.\"	$OpenBSD: xf86.4,v 1.8 1999/07/07 10:50:10 aaron Exp $
+.\"	$OpenBSD: xf86.4,v 1.9 1999/07/09 13:35:44 aaron Exp $
 .\"
 .\" Copyright (c) 1998 Matthieu Herrb
 .\" All rights reserved.
@@ -35,21 +35,21 @@ XFree86 aperture driver
 .Sh SYNOPSIS
 .Cd "option APERTURE"
 .Sh DESCRIPTION
-The 
+The
 .Pa /dev/xf86
 driver provides access to the memory and I/O ports of a VGA board for
-use by the XFree86 X servers 
+use by the XFree86 X servers
 when running with a kernel security level > 0.
 .Pp
 The X servers require the use of this driver.
 .Sh ACCESS CONTROL
-Access to the 
-.Pa /dev/xf86 
+Access to the
+.Pa /dev/xf86
 device is allowed when the sysctl variable
-.Va machdep.allowaperture 
-= 1. This variable (which default value is 0) 
+.Va machdep.allowaperture
+= 1. This variable (which default value is 0)
 can only be manipulated when the security level is <= 0, so it should be
-set in 
+set in
 .Pa /etc/sysctl.conf .
 .Sh SEE ALSO
 .Xr XF86_Accel 1 ,
@@ -59,17 +59,17 @@ set in
 .Xr config 8 ,
 .Xr sysctl 8
 .Sh HISTORY
-.Pa /dev/xf86 
+.Pa /dev/xf86
 was introduced as a loadable kernel module for NetBSD 0.9C
 with XFree86 3.1. It was integrated as an in-kernel device on
 .Ox 2.3 .
 It is required in order to allow access to I/O ports for all X servers
-since 
+since
 .Ox 2.4 .
 .Sh AUTHOR
 The aperture driver was written by Matthieu Herrb.
 .Sh BUGS
 This driver allows access to all addresses above
-.Va physmem . 
+.Va physmem .
 It should be restricted to the actual address range of the video
-memory. 
+memory.
diff --git a/share/man/man4/man4.mac68k/intro.4 b/share/man/man4/man4.mac68k/intro.4
index c03305f8846..3e7255b977f 100644
--- a/share/man/man4/man4.mac68k/intro.4
+++ b/share/man/man4/man4.mac68k/intro.4
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-.\"	$OpenBSD: intro.4,v 1.2 1999/05/16 19:57:08 alex Exp $
+.\"	$OpenBSD: intro.4,v 1.3 1999/07/09 13:35:40 aaron Exp $
 .\"	$NetBSD: intro.4,v 1.4 1997/03/28 00:29:35 veego Exp $
 .\"
 .\" Copyright (c) 1990, 1991 Regents of the University of California.
@@ -99,7 +99,7 @@ The
 .Tn Mac68k
 .Nm intro
 man page first appeared in
-.Nx 
+.Nx
 1.2 .
 .Sh SEE ALSO
 .Xr autoconf 4 ,
@@ -107,7 +107,7 @@ man page first appeared in
 .Xr config 8
 .Sh LIST OF DEVICES
 The devices listed below are supported in this incarnation of
-the system. 
+the system.
 Devices are indicated by their functional interface.
 Not all supported devices are listed.
 .Bl -tag -width "xxxxxx" -compact -offset indent
@@ -116,7 +116,7 @@ Apple Desktop Bus event interface
 .It Em ae
 DP8390-based ethernet interface
 .It Em asc
-Apple Sound Chip 
+Apple Sound Chip
 .It Em esp
 .Tn NCR
 53C9x built-in SCSI interface
diff --git a/share/man/man4/man4.mvme68k/le.4 b/share/man/man4/man4.mvme68k/le.4
index 132ea088c34..b51f54112d1 100644
--- a/share/man/man4/man4.mvme68k/le.4
+++ b/share/man/man4/man4.mvme68k/le.4
@@ -35,18 +35,18 @@
 .\"
 .\"	from: Header: le.4,v 1.2 92/10/13 05:31:33 leres Exp
 .\"	from: @(#)le.4	8.1 (Berkeley) 6/9/93
-.\"	$Id: le.4,v 1.3 1999/05/16 19:57:12 alex Exp $
+.\"	$Id: le.4,v 1.4 1999/07/09 13:35:40 aaron Exp $
 .\"
 .Dd August 30, 1994
 .Dt LE 4 amiga
 .Os
 .Sh NAME
 .Nm le
-.Nd Ethernet driver for AMD7990(LANCE)-based boards 
+.Nd Ethernet driver for AMD7990(LANCE)-based boards
 .Sh SYNOPSIS
 .Cd "le* at zbus0"
 .Sh DESCRIPTION
-The 
+The
 .Nm
 interface provides access to the 10 Mb/s Ethernet network via the
 .Tn AMD
diff --git a/share/man/man4/man4.pc532/lpt.4 b/share/man/man4/man4.pc532/lpt.4
index b94dc331bdd..d981ceecf8a 100644
--- a/share/man/man4/man4.pc532/lpt.4
+++ b/share/man/man4/man4.pc532/lpt.4
@@ -28,7 +28,7 @@
 .\" (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF
 .\" THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
 .\"
-.\"	$Id: lpt.4,v 1.4 1998/09/05 17:41:49 deraadt Exp $
+.\"	$Id: lpt.4,v 1.5 1999/07/09 13:35:40 aaron Exp $
 .\"
 .Dd December 1, 1994
 .Dt LPT 4 pc532
@@ -43,7 +43,7 @@
 This driver provides access to centronics ports. Bit 6 in the minor number
 selects wether to omit pulling /PRIME low on opens or not. If the minor has
 bit 5 set, AUTOLINEFEED will be asserted when transferring data to the printer.
-Addr and Irq default to 0xffc80030,7 for lpt0 and to 0xffc80034,6 for lpt1. 
+Addr and Irq default to 0xffc80030,7 for lpt0 and to 0xffc80034,6 for lpt1.
 .Sh FILES
 .Bl -tag -width Pa -compact
 .It Pa /dev/lpt0
diff --git a/share/man/man4/man4.pmax/asc.4 b/share/man/man4/man4.pmax/asc.4
index 613d6db6f99..1127fca4a31 100644
--- a/share/man/man4/man4.pmax/asc.4
+++ b/share/man/man4/man4.pmax/asc.4
@@ -28,7 +28,7 @@
 .\" THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
 .\"
 .\"	$NetBSD: asc.4,v 1.2 1997/10/13 11:23:41 lukem Exp $
-.\"	$OpenBSD: asc.4,v 1.4 1999/05/16 19:57:12 alex Exp $
+.\"	$OpenBSD: asc.4,v 1.5 1999/07/09 13:35:41 aaron Exp $
 .\"
 .Dd August 6, 1996
 .Dt ASC 4 pmax
@@ -76,7 +76,7 @@ higher-level layer, and the
 .Nm rz
 and
 .Nm tz
-devices, which first appeared in 
+devices, which first appeared in
 .Bx 4.4 /pmax.
 It should be  re-written to support the
 .Nm scsibus
diff --git a/share/man/man4/man4.pmax/dc.4 b/share/man/man4/man4.pmax/dc.4
index 83727b130e0..acac9fb1f21 100644
--- a/share/man/man4/man4.pmax/dc.4
+++ b/share/man/man4/man4.pmax/dc.4
@@ -28,7 +28,7 @@
 .\" THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
 .\"
 .\"	$NetBSD: dc.4,v 1.3 1998/02/23 19:46:24 jonathan Exp $
-.\"	$OpenBSD: dc.4,v 1.3 1999/04/02 16:21:37 aaron Exp $
+.\"	$OpenBSD: dc.4,v 1.4 1999/07/09 13:35:40 aaron Exp $
 .\"
 .Dd February 20, 1998
 .Dt DC 4 pmax
@@ -36,7 +36,7 @@
 .Sh NAME
 .Nm dc
 .Nd
-dc659, dc7085 DZ11-on-a-chip serial communications interface 
+dc659, dc7085 DZ11-on-a-chip serial communications interface
 .Sh SYNOPSIS
 .Cd "dc0 at ioasic?"
 .Cd "dc0 at mainbus"
@@ -67,11 +67,11 @@ The
 device is in essence a single-chip clone of the DZ-11.
 The DZ-11 hardware design severely constrains performance.
 One small input silo is shared across all input ports.
-The 
+The
 .Nm dc
 hardware does not interrupt on modem transitions; instead,
 they are detected via polling.
-Only two lines on a baseboard 
+Only two lines on a baseboard
 .Nm dc
 device  have any modem control signals;
 the other two lines are wired for a keyboard and mouse.
@@ -83,9 +83,9 @@ and dialout detection, but without hardware flow control, the
 .Nm
 device is prone to overruns when used for serial-line protocols.
 
-The DECstation 5000/200 
+The DECstation 5000/200
 .Nm
-hardware provides full modem control on 
+hardware provides full modem control on
 both bulkhead RS-232 ports and is less prone to overrun.
 .Sh BUGS
 The 19200 speed on all
@@ -99,11 +99,11 @@ at its 19800 speed setting.
 .Pp
 The DECstation 5000/200 can set a bit in the system register
 to allow the
-.Nm 
+.Nm
 to run at 38400, but this applies to all four lines and disables
 the 19200 speed on all four lines. This feature is not currently supported.
 .Pp
-The 
+The
 .Nm
 driver should be merged into a single driver supporting the original
 DZ-11, DZ-32, and Qbus DZV-11 and DZQ-11 clones.
@@ -112,5 +112,5 @@ The
 .Nm
 driver
 first appeared in
-.Bx 4.4 /pmax. This manual page first appeared in 
+.Bx 4.4 /pmax. This manual page first appeared in
 .Nx 1.2 .
diff --git a/share/man/man4/man4.pmax/intro.4 b/share/man/man4/man4.pmax/intro.4
index ee240c4035c..3823d1738b0 100644
--- a/share/man/man4/man4.pmax/intro.4
+++ b/share/man/man4/man4.pmax/intro.4
@@ -28,7 +28,7 @@
 .\" THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
 .\"
 .\"	$NetBSD: intro.4,v 1.2 1997/10/13 11:23:47 lukem Exp $
-.\"	$OpenBSD: intro.4,v 1.4 1999/07/02 20:11:51 aaron Exp $
+.\"	$OpenBSD: intro.4,v 1.5 1999/07/09 13:35:40 aaron Exp $
 .\"
 .Dd October 13, 1997
 .Dt INTRO 4 pmax
@@ -136,7 +136,7 @@ serial driver for DEC custom four-port serial device (dc7085 DZ-11 clone)
 on the baseboard of DECstation 2100/31000, 5100, and 5000/200 systems.
 .It scc
 serial driver for Zilog SCC asynchronous/synchronous devices on the
-baseboard of DECstation 5000-series systems (excluding 5000/200). 
+baseboard of DECstation 5000-series systems (excluding 5000/200).
 .It le
 Ethernet driver for baseboard or TurboChannel option cards.
 .It ioasic
diff --git a/share/man/man4/man4.pmax/ioasic.4 b/share/man/man4/man4.pmax/ioasic.4
index 6d1f896f271..63edcc847fe 100644
--- a/share/man/man4/man4.pmax/ioasic.4
+++ b/share/man/man4/man4.pmax/ioasic.4
@@ -28,7 +28,7 @@
 .\" THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
 .\"
 .\"	$NetBSD: ioasic.4,v 1.4 1997/10/31 02:26:09 jonathan Exp $
-.\"	$OpenBSD: ioasic.4,v 1.5 1999/07/05 03:35:58 aaron Exp $
+.\"	$OpenBSD: ioasic.4,v 1.6 1999/07/09 13:35:40 aaron Exp $
 .\"
 .Dd August 6, 1996
 .Dt IOASIC 4 pmax
@@ -63,9 +63,9 @@ Ethernet interface.
 .Pp
 The
 .Nm
-is also used for those 
+is also used for those
 floppy-disc drive and audio/ISDN hardware
-on the Personal DECstation and audio-equipted TC Alphas, where the 
+on the Personal DECstation and audio-equipted TC Alphas, where the
 .Nm
 hardware provides a
 scatter-gather DMA channel between he 16-bit device and the 32-bit
@@ -76,7 +76,7 @@ Support for scatter-gather DMA eliminates the need for additional copying.
 A baseboard
 .Nm asc
 SCSI adaptor attached to an
-.Nm ioasic 
+.Nm ioasic
 will give slightly better performance than its
 .Nm tc
 counterpart.
diff --git a/share/man/man4/man4.pmax/le.4 b/share/man/man4/man4.pmax/le.4
index 006003874d9..8c746fe0a0a 100644
--- a/share/man/man4/man4.pmax/le.4
+++ b/share/man/man4/man4.pmax/le.4
@@ -28,7 +28,7 @@
 .\" THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
 .\"
 .\"	$NetBSD: le.4,v 1.2 1997/10/31 02:53:46 jonathan Exp $
-.\"	$OpenBSD: le.4,v 1.4 1999/05/16 19:57:15 alex Exp $
+.\"	$OpenBSD: le.4,v 1.5 1999/07/09 13:35:41 aaron Exp $
 .\"
 .Dd August 6, 1996
 .Dt LE 4 pmax
@@ -52,7 +52,7 @@ driver provides access to a 10Mb/s Ethernet via the
 Ethernet chip.  All
 .Tn LANCE
 interfaces on
-.Tn DECstations  
+.Tn DECstations
 are supported, as are interfaces on
 .Tn "Alpha AXP"
 machines with a
@@ -60,7 +60,7 @@ machines with a
 bus.
 .Pp
 The
-.Nm 
+.Nm
 driver employs the Address Resolution Protocol described in
 .Xr arp 4
 to map between Internet and Ethernet addresses on the local
@@ -78,7 +78,7 @@ model 5000/200
 baseboard device provides only a BNC connector.
 The
 .Nm ioasic
-baseboard devices and  the 
+baseboard devices and  the
 .Tn PMAD-AA
 .Tn TurboChannel
 option card provide only an AUI port.
@@ -93,11 +93,11 @@ option card provide only an AUI port.
 On all front-ends, performance is impaired by hardware which forces
 a software copy of packets to and from DMA buffers.  The
 .Nm ioasic
-machines  and the DECstation 3100 must 
+machines  and the DECstation 3100 must
 copying packet to and from non-contiguous DMA buffers.
-The 
+The
 DECstation 5000/200  and the
-.Tn PMAD-AA 
+.Tn PMAD-AA
 must copy to and from an onboard SRAM DMA
 buffer.  The CPU overhead is noticeable, but all machines can sustain
 10Mbit media speed.
diff --git a/share/man/man4/man4.pmax/lk201.4 b/share/man/man4/man4.pmax/lk201.4
index e6cbff0aa6d..dbe4b23b261 100644
--- a/share/man/man4/man4.pmax/lk201.4
+++ b/share/man/man4/man4.pmax/lk201.4
@@ -28,7 +28,7 @@
 .\" THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
 .\"
 .\"	$NetBSD: lk201.4,v 1.2 1997/10/13 11:23:53 lukem Exp $
-.\"	$OpenBSD: lk201.4,v 1.2 1998/03/09 15:37:23 millert Exp $
+.\"	$OpenBSD: lk201.4,v 1.3 1999/07/09 13:35:41 aaron Exp $
 .\"
 .Dd August 6, 1996
 .Dt LK201 4 pmax
@@ -52,7 +52,7 @@ structure for keypress events and pointer (mouse) events.  The
 .Nm fb
 driver redirects mouse and keyboard input into this in-kernel
 structure, and updates the position of a framebuffer cursor sprite to
-track the mouse.  This is for compatibility with the 
+track the mouse.  This is for compatibility with the
 .Nm qv
 QVSS-style software interface used by X11 on  DECstation and Vaxstation
 framebuffers.   This design offers significantly better performance
diff --git a/share/man/man4/man4.pmax/px.4 b/share/man/man4/man4.pmax/px.4
index 5c06b3d3edd..dacecf87f22 100644
--- a/share/man/man4/man4.pmax/px.4
+++ b/share/man/man4/man4.pmax/px.4
@@ -28,7 +28,7 @@
 .\" THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
 .\"
 .\"	$NetBSD: px.4,v 1.1 1997/11/08 07:27:56 jonathan Exp $
-.\"	$OpenBSD: px.4,v 1.3 1999/04/02 16:21:37 aaron Exp $
+.\"	$OpenBSD: px.4,v 1.4 1999/07/09 13:35:41 aaron Exp $
 .\"
 .Dd November 11, 1997
 .Dt PX 4 pmax
@@ -49,12 +49,12 @@ video display option card.
 The
 .Nm
 driver does nothing except remove the requirement to remove
-.Tn PMAG-C 
+.Tn PMAG-C
 cards in order to boot
-.Nx . 
+.Nx .
 It offers no support for either raster consoles
 or X11 servers.
-To do either requires using the undocumented packet 
+To do either requires using the undocumented packet
 protocol used to talk to the on-board blitter chip.
 .Pp
 .Sh SEE ALSO
@@ -71,7 +71,7 @@ glass-tty raster framebuffer console driver assumes
 direct bit read/write access to a framebuffer. The
 .Nm
 hardware does not provide this.
-.Nm rcons 
+.Nm rcons
 should be replaced with a driver that allows a character-painting
 interface as well as direct blitting.
 .Pp
@@ -81,6 +81,6 @@ ABI. Work on this is in progress.
 .Sh HISTORY
 The
 .Nm
-driver 
+driver
 first appeared in
 .Nx 1.3 .
diff --git a/share/man/man4/man4.pmax/scc.4 b/share/man/man4/man4.pmax/scc.4
index cee8a8b88a1..15c819e4bbb 100644
--- a/share/man/man4/man4.pmax/scc.4
+++ b/share/man/man4/man4.pmax/scc.4
@@ -28,7 +28,7 @@
 .\" THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
 .\"
 .\"	$NetBSD: scc.4,v 1.3 1997/11/03 11:19:21 jonathan Exp $
-.\"	$OpenBSD: scc.4,v 1.2 1998/03/09 15:37:26 millert Exp $
+.\"	$OpenBSD: scc.4,v 1.3 1999/07/09 13:35:41 aaron Exp $
 .\"
 .Dd August 6, 1996
 .Dt SCC 4 pmax
@@ -71,13 +71,13 @@ On machines with one port like
 .Tn "Personal DECstations" ,
 the single device is
 .Pa ttya .
-On the 
-.Tn "5000/1xx" 
+On the
+.Tn "5000/1xx"
 and
 .Tn "5000/2xx" ,
 the first serial port (default serial console) is
 .Pa ttyc
-and the second port is 
+and the second port is
 .Pa ttya .
 .Sh HISTORY
 The
@@ -98,7 +98,7 @@ tries to hide the hardware  mapping, but
 .Nx
 does not.  Users wanting to use
 .Tn "Ultrix"
-compatible tty names 
+compatible tty names
 .Pa /dev/tty0
 and
 .Pa /dev/tty1
diff --git a/share/man/man4/man4.pmax/sii.4 b/share/man/man4/man4.pmax/sii.4
index 21fdfc0fcaa..fb478f0d16c 100644
--- a/share/man/man4/man4.pmax/sii.4
+++ b/share/man/man4/man4.pmax/sii.4
@@ -28,7 +28,7 @@
 .\" THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
 .\"
 .\"	$NetBSD: sii.4,v 1.2 1997/10/13 11:23:58 lukem Exp $
-.\"	$OpenBSD: sii.4,v 1.3 1999/05/16 19:57:15 alex Exp $
+.\"	$OpenBSD: sii.4,v 1.4 1999/07/09 13:35:41 aaron Exp $
 .\"
 .Dd August 6, 1996
 .Dt SII 4 pmax
@@ -81,7 +81,7 @@ higher-level layer, and the
 .Nm rz
 and
 .Nm tz
-devices, which first appeared in 
+devices, which first appeared in
 .Bx 4.4 /pmax.
 It should be  re-written to support the
 .Nm scsibus
diff --git a/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/audioamd.4 b/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/audioamd.4
index ae81f4e58f4..5cd86841e2d 100644
--- a/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/audioamd.4
+++ b/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/audioamd.4
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-.\"     $OpenBSD: audioamd.4,v 1.1 1998/07/15 04:42:29 jason Exp $
+.\"     $OpenBSD: audioamd.4,v 1.2 1999/07/09 13:35:42 aaron Exp $
 .\"
 .\" Copyright (c) 1998 Jason L. Wright (jason@thought.net)
 .\" All rights reserved.
@@ -20,7 +20,7 @@
 .\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR
 .\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
 .\" WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
-.\" DISCLAIMED.  IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, 
+.\" DISCLAIMED.  IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT,
 .\" INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
 .\" (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR
 .\" SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
@@ -41,7 +41,7 @@
 .Cd "audioamd0 at sbus0 slot ? offset ?            " Pq "sun4m"
 .Cd "audio*  at audioamd?"
 .Sh DESCRIPTION
-The 
+The
 .Nm
 device uses the
 .Tn AMD
diff --git a/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/audiocs.4 b/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/audiocs.4
index f866cb17ec9..615993f550d 100644
--- a/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/audiocs.4
+++ b/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/audiocs.4
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-.\"     $OpenBSD: audiocs.4,v 1.1 1999/06/06 04:48:25 jason Exp $
+.\"     $OpenBSD: audiocs.4,v 1.2 1999/07/09 13:35:42 aaron Exp $
 .\"
 .\" Copyright (c) 1999 Jason L. Wright (jason@thought.net)
 .\" All rights reserved.
@@ -20,7 +20,7 @@
 .\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR
 .\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
 .\" WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
-.\" DISCLAIMED.  IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, 
+.\" DISCLAIMED.  IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT,
 .\" INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
 .\" (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR
 .\" SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
@@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
 .Cd "audiocs0 at sbus0 slot ? offset ?            " Pq "sun4m"
 .Cd "audio*  at audiocs?"
 .Sh DESCRIPTION
-The 
+The
 .Nm
 device uses the
 .Tn Crystal Semiconductor
diff --git a/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/be.4 b/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/be.4
index 158e5f85d21..9f58bd83909 100644
--- a/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/be.4
+++ b/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/be.4
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-.\"     $OpenBSD: be.4,v 1.7 1999/05/16 19:57:16 alex Exp $
+.\"     $OpenBSD: be.4,v 1.8 1999/07/09 13:35:41 aaron Exp $
 .\"
 .\" Copyright (c) 1998 Jason L. Wright (jason@thought.net)
 .\" All rights reserved.
@@ -20,7 +20,7 @@
 .\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR
 .\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
 .\" WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
-.\" DISCLAIMED.  IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, 
+.\" DISCLAIMED.  IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT,
 .\" INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
 .\" (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR
 .\" SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
@@ -39,12 +39,12 @@
 .Cd "qec* at sbus? slot ? offset ?                 " Pq "sun4c/sun4m"
 .Cd "be* at qec?                                   " Pq "sun4c/sun4m"
 .Sh DESCRIPTION
-The 
+The
 .Nm
 interface provides access to the 10Mb/s and 100Mb/s (half duplex only)
 Ethernet networks.
-The 
-.Nm 
+The
+.Nm
 is found on the Sun 10/100 Mbit Ethernet boards
 (Sun part number SUNW,501-2655).
 .Pp
diff --git a/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/bwtwo.4 b/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/bwtwo.4
index 8a73b7f59f9..62728969188 100644
--- a/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/bwtwo.4
+++ b/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/bwtwo.4
@@ -35,7 +35,7 @@
 .\"
 .\"	from: Header: bwtwo.4,v 1.3 94/02/03 20:42:13 leres Exp
 .\"     from: @(#)bwtwo.4	8.2 (Berkeley) 2/16/94
-.\"	$Id: bwtwo.4,v 1.4 1999/05/16 19:57:17 alex Exp $
+.\"	$Id: bwtwo.4,v 1.5 1999/07/09 13:35:41 aaron Exp $
 .\"
 .Dd February 16, 1994
 .Dt BWTWO 4 sparc
@@ -49,7 +49,7 @@
 .Cd "bwtwo0 at obio0 addr 0xfb300000 level 4" Pq "sun4/300 in P4 slot"
 .Cd "bwtwo0 at obio0 addr 0x0b300000 level 4" Pq "sun4/100 in P4 slot"
 .Sh DESCRIPTION
-The 
+The
 .Nm
 is a memory based black and white frame buffer.
 It supports the minimal ioctl's needed to run
@@ -57,8 +57,8 @@ It supports the minimal ioctl's needed to run
 .Sh SEE ALSO
 .Xr cgeight 4 ,
 .Xr cgfour 4 ,
-.Xr cgfourteen 4 , 
+.Xr cgfourteen 4 ,
 .Xr cgsix 4 ,
 .Xr cgthree 4 ,
 .Xr cgtwo 4 ,
-.Xr tcx 4 
+.Xr tcx 4
diff --git a/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/cgeight.4 b/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/cgeight.4
index 1608572cf32..b9d635c2851 100644
--- a/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/cgeight.4
+++ b/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/cgeight.4
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-.\"	$OpenBSD: cgeight.4,v 1.5 1999/05/16 19:57:17 alex Exp $
+.\"	$OpenBSD: cgeight.4,v 1.6 1999/07/09 13:35:41 aaron Exp $
 .\"	$NetBSD: cgeight.4,v 1.2 1997/10/08 22:00:03 jtc Exp $
 .\"
 .\" Copyright (c) 1996 The NetBSD Foundation, Inc.
@@ -26,7 +26,7 @@
 .\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE NETBSD FOUNDATION, INC. AND CONTRIBUTORS
 .\" ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED
 .\" TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
-.\" PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED.  IN NO EVENT SHALL THE FOUNDATION OR CONTRIBUTORS 
+.\" PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED.  IN NO EVENT SHALL THE FOUNDATION OR CONTRIBUTORS
 .\" BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
 .\" CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF
 .\" SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
@@ -45,7 +45,7 @@
 .Cd "cgeight0 at obio0 addr 0xfb300000 level 4" Pq sun4/300
 .Cd "cgeight0 at obio0 addr 0x0b300000 level 4" Pq sun4/100
 .Sh DESCRIPTION
-The 
+The
 .Nm
 is a memory based color frame buffer.
 Its pixel memory can be mapped into a user process address space
@@ -59,8 +59,8 @@ driver supports the minimal ioctl's needed to run
 .Sh SEE ALSO
 .Xr bwtwo 4 ,
 .Xr cgfour 4 ,
-.Xr cgfourteen 4 , 
+.Xr cgfourteen 4 ,
 .Xr cgsix 4 ,
 .Xr cgthree 4 ,
 .Xr cgtwo 4 ,
-.Xr tcx 4 
+.Xr tcx 4
diff --git a/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/cgfour.4 b/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/cgfour.4
index 5d00c70cfad..3ed2759b9b6 100644
--- a/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/cgfour.4
+++ b/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/cgfour.4
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-.\"	$OpenBSD: cgfour.4,v 1.5 1999/05/16 19:57:18 alex Exp $
+.\"	$OpenBSD: cgfour.4,v 1.6 1999/07/09 13:35:41 aaron Exp $
 .\"	$NetBSD: cgfour.4,v 1.2 1997/10/08 22:00:05 jtc Exp $
 .\"
 .\" Copyright (c) 1996 The NetBSD Foundation, Inc.
@@ -26,7 +26,7 @@
 .\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE NETBSD FOUNDATION, INC. AND CONTRIBUTORS
 .\" ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED
 .\" TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
-.\" PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED.  IN NO EVENT SHALL THE FOUNDATION OR CONTRIBUTORS 
+.\" PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED.  IN NO EVENT SHALL THE FOUNDATION OR CONTRIBUTORS
 .\" BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
 .\" CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF
 .\" SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
@@ -45,7 +45,7 @@
 .Cd "cgfour0 at obio0 addr 0xfb300000 level 4" Pq sun4/300
 .Cd "cgfour0 at obio0 addr 0x0b300000 level 4" Pq sun4/100
 .Sh DESCRIPTION
-The 
+The
 .Nm
 is a memory based color frame buffer with overlay plane.
 Its pixel memory and control planes can be mapped into a user
@@ -64,4 +64,4 @@ driver supports the minimal ioctl's needed to run
 .Xr cgsix 4 ,
 .Xr cgthree 4 ,
 .Xr cgtwo 4 ,
-.Xr tcx 4 
+.Xr tcx 4
diff --git a/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/cgfourteen.4 b/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/cgfourteen.4
index 07c7f9b37e3..d78a95672ed 100644
--- a/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/cgfourteen.4
+++ b/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/cgfourteen.4
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-.\"	$OpenBSD: cgfourteen.4,v 1.5 1999/05/16 19:57:18 alex Exp $
+.\"	$OpenBSD: cgfourteen.4,v 1.6 1999/07/09 13:35:41 aaron Exp $
 .\"	$NetBSD: cgfourteen.4,v 1.3 1998/06/11 08:32:20 fair Exp $
 .\"
 .\" Copyright (c) 1996 The President and Fellows of Harvard College.
@@ -18,7 +18,7 @@
 .\"    documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
 .\" 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software
 .\"    must display the following acknowledgement:
-.\"        This product includes software developed by the Harvard 
+.\"        This product includes software developed by the Harvard
 .\"        University and its contributors.
 .\"        This product includes software developed by the NetBSD
 .\"        Foundation, Inc. and its contributors.
@@ -29,7 +29,7 @@
 .\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE NETBSD FOUNDATION, INC. AND CONTRIBUTORS
 .\" ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED
 .\" TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
-.\" PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED.  IN NO EVENT SHALL THE FOUNDATION OR CONTRIBUTORS 
+.\" PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED.  IN NO EVENT SHALL THE FOUNDATION OR CONTRIBUTORS
 .\" BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
 .\" CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF
 .\" SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
@@ -37,7 +37,7 @@
 .\" CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)
 .\" ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE
 .\" POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\" Based on tcx.4,
 .\"	NetBSD: tcx.4,v 1.2 1996/06/21 22:35:06 pk Exp
 .\"
@@ -50,10 +50,10 @@
 .Sh SYNOPSIS
 .Cd "cgfourteen0 at obio0" Pq "SS10-M and SS20"
 .Sh DESCRIPTION
-The 
+The
 .Nm cgfourteen
 is a memory based color frame buffer, with graphics acceleration and
-overlay capabilities. Its pixel memory can be mapped into a user process 
+overlay capabilities. Its pixel memory can be mapped into a user process
 address space by using
 the
 .Xr mmap 2
@@ -68,7 +68,7 @@ The driver operates by default in
 emulation mode, i.e.
 in 8-bit unaccelerated mode.
 This emulation does include support for the hardware cursor present on the
-.Nm cgfourteen , 
+.Nm cgfourteen ,
 however.
 .Sh SEE ALSO
 .Xr bwtwo 4 ,
@@ -77,4 +77,4 @@ however.
 .Xr cgsix 4 ,
 .Xr cgthree 4 ,
 .Xr cgtwo 4 ,
-.Xr tcx 4 
+.Xr tcx 4
diff --git a/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/cgsix.4 b/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/cgsix.4
index 63d746d2da4..d3fae38f439 100644
--- a/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/cgsix.4
+++ b/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/cgsix.4
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-.\"	$OpenBSD: cgsix.4,v 1.5 1999/05/16 19:57:19 alex Exp $
+.\"	$OpenBSD: cgsix.4,v 1.6 1999/07/09 13:35:41 aaron Exp $
 .\"	$NetBSD: cgsix.4,v 1.4 1998/06/11 08:32:20 fair Exp $
 .\"
 .\" Copyright 1994
@@ -37,7 +37,7 @@
 .\" SUCH DAMAGE.
 .\"
 .\"	from: @(#)cgsix.4	8.1 (Berkeley) 2/16/94
-.\"	$Id: cgsix.4,v 1.5 1999/05/16 19:57:19 alex Exp $
+.\"	$Id: cgsix.4,v 1.6 1999/07/09 13:35:41 aaron Exp $
 .\"
 .Dd February 16, 1994
 .Dt CGSIX 4 sparc
@@ -50,7 +50,7 @@
 .Cd "cgsix0 at obio0 addr 0xfb000000 level 4" Pq sun4/300 P4
 .Cd "cgsix0 at obio0 addr 0x0b000000 level 4" Pq sun4/100 P4
 .Sh DESCRIPTION
-The 
+The
 .Nm cgsix
 is a memory based color frame buffer.
 It supports the minimal ioctl's needed to run
@@ -59,7 +59,7 @@ It supports the minimal ioctl's needed to run
 .Xr bwtwo 4 ,
 .Xr cgeight 4 ,
 .Xr cgfour 4 ,
-.Xr cgfourteen 4 , 
+.Xr cgfourteen 4 ,
 .Xr cgthree 4 ,
 .Xr cgtwo 4 ,
 .Xr tcx 4 ,
diff --git a/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/cgthree.4 b/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/cgthree.4
index b4336a2b46a..3160e2b2f61 100644
--- a/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/cgthree.4
+++ b/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/cgthree.4
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-.\"	$OpenBSD: cgthree.4,v 1.5 1999/05/16 19:57:19 alex Exp $
+.\"	$OpenBSD: cgthree.4,v 1.6 1999/07/09 13:35:41 aaron Exp $
 .\"	$NetBSD: cgthree.4,v 1.4 1998/06/11 08:32:20 fair Exp $
 .\"
 .\" Copyright (c) 1992, 1993
@@ -38,7 +38,7 @@
 .\"
 .\"	from: Header: cgthree.4,v 1.3 94/02/03 20:49:52 leres Exp
 .\"     from: @(#)cgthree.4	8.2 (Berkeley) 2/16/94
-.\"	$Id: cgthree.4,v 1.5 1999/05/16 19:57:19 alex Exp $
+.\"	$Id: cgthree.4,v 1.6 1999/07/09 13:35:41 aaron Exp $
 .\"
 .Dd February 16, 1994
 .Dt CGTHREE 4 sparc
@@ -50,7 +50,7 @@
 .Cd "cgthree* at sbus? slot ? offset ?"
 .Cd "cgthree* at obio0 slot ? offset ?" Pq some sun4m models
 .Sh DESCRIPTION
-The 
+The
 .Nm
 is a memory based color frame buffer.
 It supports the minimal ioctl's needed to run
@@ -59,7 +59,7 @@ It supports the minimal ioctl's needed to run
 .Xr bwtwo 4 ,
 .Xr cgeight 4 ,
 .Xr cgfour 4 ,
-.Xr cgfourteen 4 , 
+.Xr cgfourteen 4 ,
 .Xr cgsix 4 ,
 .Xr cgtwo 4 ,
-.Xr tcx 4 
+.Xr tcx 4
diff --git a/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/cgtwo.4 b/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/cgtwo.4
index 7f370d8f1d9..a9429f56e34 100644
--- a/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/cgtwo.4
+++ b/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/cgtwo.4
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-.\"	$OpenBSD: cgtwo.4,v 1.5 1999/05/16 19:57:19 alex Exp $
+.\"	$OpenBSD: cgtwo.4,v 1.6 1999/07/09 13:35:41 aaron Exp $
 .\"	$NetBSD: cgtwo.4,v 1.3 1997/10/08 22:00:08 jtc Exp $
 .\"
 .\" Copyright (c) 1996 The NetBSD Foundation, Inc.
@@ -26,7 +26,7 @@
 .\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE NETBSD FOUNDATION, INC. AND CONTRIBUTORS
 .\" ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED
 .\" TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
-.\" PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED.  IN NO EVENT SHALL THE FOUNDATION OR CONTRIBUTORS 
+.\" PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED.  IN NO EVENT SHALL THE FOUNDATION OR CONTRIBUTORS
 .\" BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
 .\" CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF
 .\" SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
@@ -44,7 +44,7 @@
 .Sh SYNOPSIS
 .Cd "cgtwo* at vmes0 addr 0xff400000 level 4 vect 0xa8"
 .Sh DESCRIPTION
-The 
+The
 .Nm cgtwo
 is a memory based color frame buffer.
 Its control pixel memory can be mapped into a user process address
@@ -62,4 +62,4 @@ driver supports the minimal ioctl's needed to run
 .Xr cgfourteen 4 ,
 .Xr cgsix 4 ,
 .Xr cgthree 4 ,
-.Xr tcx 4 
+.Xr tcx 4
diff --git a/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/esp.4 b/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/esp.4
index b7d636d1eec..2da7a334fcd 100644
--- a/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/esp.4
+++ b/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/esp.4
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
-.\"	$OpenBSD: esp.4,v 1.3 1999/05/16 19:57:19 alex Exp $
+.\"	$OpenBSD: esp.4,v 1.4 1999/07/09 13:35:42 aaron Exp $
 .\"
-.\" Copyright (c) 1998 The OpenBSD Project 
+.\" Copyright (c) 1998 The OpenBSD Project
 .\" All rights reserved.
 .\"
 .\"
@@ -8,11 +8,11 @@
 .Dt ESP 4 sparc
 .Os
 .Sh NAME
-.Nm esp 
+.Nm esp
 .Nd ESP NCR 53c94 on-board or SBus SCSI controller
 .Sh SYNOPSIS
 .Cd "dma0 at obio0 addr 0xfa001000 level 4             " Pq sun4/300
-.Cd "esp0 at obio0 addr 0xfa000000 level 4 flags 0xff0f"  
+.Cd "esp0 at obio0 addr 0xfa000000 level 4 flags 0xff0f"
 .Cd ""
 .Cd "dma0 at sbus0 slot ? offset ?                     " Pq on-board
 .Cd "esp0 at sbus0 slot ? offset ? flags 0xff0f        " Pq sun4c
@@ -22,10 +22,10 @@
 .Cd "esp* at sbus? slot ? offset ? flags 0xff0f        " Pq "two flavours"
 .Cd "esp* at dma? flags 0xff0f                         " Pq "depending on model"
 .Sh DESCRIPTION
-The 
+The
 .Nm
-is an on-board or SBus SCSI controller based on the NCR 53c94 chip, found 
-on Sun 4/300, sun4c and sun4m workstations.  
+is an on-board or SBus SCSI controller based on the NCR 53c94 chip, found
+on Sun 4/300, sun4c and sun4m workstations.
 .Sh DEVICE FLAGS
 .Bl -tag -width speaker -compact
 .It Bits 0-7 disable disconnect/reselect for the corresponding target
@@ -33,10 +33,10 @@ on Sun 4/300, sun4c and sun4m workstations.
 .It Bits 8-15 disable synchronous negotiation for target "[bit - 8]"
 .El
 .Pp
-The 
-.Nm 
+The
+.Nm
 device flags may be OR'd together to enable any combination of
-the features listed above.  Targets 4 through 7 typically have 
+the features listed above.  Targets 4 through 7 typically have
 disconnect/reselect enabled on the premise that tape devices normally
 have one of these targets.  Tape devices should be allowed to disconnect
 for the SCSI bus to operate acceptably.
diff --git a/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/fd.4 b/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/fd.4
index 7aeb7c573eb..b72048b7a62 100644
--- a/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/fd.4
+++ b/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/fd.4
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-.\"	$OpenBSD: fd.4,v 1.2 1998/07/13 02:42:17 jason Exp $
+.\"	$OpenBSD: fd.4,v 1.3 1999/07/09 13:35:42 aaron Exp $
 .\"	$NetBSD: fd.4,v 1.4 1997/11/12 00:49:42 mrg Exp $
 .\"
 .\" Copyright (c) 1996 The NetBSD Foundation, Inc.
@@ -26,7 +26,7 @@
 .\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE NETBSD FOUNDATION, INC. AND CONTRIBUTORS
 .\" ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED
 .\" TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
-.\" PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED.  IN NO EVENT SHALL THE FOUNDATION OR CONTRIBUTORS 
+.\" PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED.  IN NO EVENT SHALL THE FOUNDATION OR CONTRIBUTORS
 .\" BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
 .\" CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF
 .\" SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
diff --git a/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/hme.4 b/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/hme.4
index a2a69ad7969..33f5c1c0767 100644
--- a/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/hme.4
+++ b/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/hme.4
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-.\"     $OpenBSD: hme.4,v 1.5 1999/05/16 19:57:20 alex Exp $
+.\"     $OpenBSD: hme.4,v 1.6 1999/07/09 13:35:42 aaron Exp $
 .\"
 .\" Copyright (c) 1998 Jason L. Wright (jason@thought.net)
 .\" All rights reserved.
@@ -20,7 +20,7 @@
 .\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR
 .\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
 .\" WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
-.\" DISCLAIMED.  IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, 
+.\" DISCLAIMED.  IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT,
 .\" INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
 .\" (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR
 .\" SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
@@ -40,7 +40,7 @@
 .Cd "nsphy* at mii? phy ?                          " Pq "sun4c/sun4m"
 .Cd "qsphy* at mii? phy ?                          " Pq "sun4c/sun4m"
 .Sh DESCRIPTION
-The 
+The
 .Nm
 interface provides access to the 10Mb/s and 100Mb/s Ethernet networks via the
 .Tn National
@@ -51,9 +51,9 @@ or the
 QS6612
 Ethernet MII Transceiver for Category 5 Twisted Pair Cable
 chip sets.
-The 
-.Nm 
-is found on the SunSwift and Sun QuadFastEthernet boards.  
+The
+.Nm
+is found on the SunSwift and Sun QuadFastEthernet boards.
 .Pp
 Each of the host's network addresses
 is specified at boot time with an
diff --git a/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/ie.4 b/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/ie.4
index 7fa58693632..cded0d5694f 100644
--- a/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/ie.4
+++ b/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/ie.4
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
-.\"     $OpenBSD: ie.4,v 1.3 1999/05/16 19:57:20 alex Exp $
+.\"     $OpenBSD: ie.4,v 1.4 1999/07/09 13:35:42 aaron Exp $
 .\"
-.\" Copyright (c) 1998 The OpenBSD Project 
+.\" Copyright (c) 1998 The OpenBSD Project
 .\" All rights reserved.
 .\"
 .Dd March 9, 1998
@@ -17,15 +17,15 @@
 .Cd "ie3 at vmes0 addr 0xff35ff02 level 5 vect 0x77" Pq "VME"
 .Cd "ie4 at vmes0 addr 0xff2dff02 level 5 vect 0x7c" Pq "VME"
 .Sh DESCRIPTION
-The 
+The
 .Nm
 interface provides access to the 10 Mb/s Ethernet network via the
 .Tn Intel
 82586
-Ethernet chip set.  The 
-.Nm 
-is found as an on-board interface on Sun 4/100, and 4/200 workstations.  
-The 
+Ethernet chip set.  The
+.Nm
+is found as an on-board interface on Sun 4/100, and 4/200 workstations.
+The
 .Nm
 also exists as a VME card.
 .Pp
diff --git a/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/intro.4 b/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/intro.4
index 76f4c0d9dd0..5f1a57b075d 100644
--- a/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/intro.4
+++ b/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/intro.4
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-.\"     $OpenBSD: intro.4,v 1.10 1999/04/18 12:38:12 jason Exp $
+.\"     $OpenBSD: intro.4,v 1.11 1999/07/09 13:35:42 aaron Exp $
 .\"	$NetBSD: intro.4,v 1.5 1998/02/06 06:07:00 perry Exp $
 .\"
 .\" Copyright (c) 1996 Jonathan Stone.
@@ -203,7 +203,7 @@ black and white obio frame buffer
 .It eeprom
 Sun non-volatile configuration RAM driver
 .It esp
-NCR53C90 ESP100 (Sun 4/300), 
+NCR53C90 ESP100 (Sun 4/300),
 .br
 ESP100A (sun4c),
 .br
@@ -278,6 +278,6 @@ ROSS Mbus HyperSPARC modules
 .Sh HISTORY
 The
 sparc
-.Nm 
+.Nm
 first appeared with
 .Ox 2.3 .
diff --git a/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/kbd.4 b/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/kbd.4
index f1f93b8f23f..c3850bfb5e9 100644
--- a/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/kbd.4
+++ b/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/kbd.4
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-.\"	$OpenBSD: kbd.4,v 1.4 1999/05/16 19:57:20 alex Exp $
+.\"	$OpenBSD: kbd.4,v 1.5 1999/07/09 13:35:42 aaron Exp $
 .\"	$NetBSD: kbd.4,v 1.3 1997/11/25 22:15:56 pk Exp $
 .\"
 .\" Copyright (c) 1996 The NetBSD Foundation, Inc.
@@ -26,7 +26,7 @@
 .\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE NETBSD FOUNDATION, INC. AND CONTRIBUTORS
 .\" ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED
 .\" TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
-.\" PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED.  IN NO EVENT SHALL THE FOUNDATION OR CONTRIBUTORS 
+.\" PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED.  IN NO EVENT SHALL THE FOUNDATION OR CONTRIBUTORS
 .\" BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
 .\" CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF
 .\" SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
@@ -118,7 +118,7 @@ mode, while a value of zero will make it return to
 mode.
 .It KIOCSKEY
 Set key station translation. The argument is of type
-.Fa "struct kiockey *" 
+.Fa "struct kiockey *"
 .Pq see Pa /usr/include/machine/kbio.h No for more details .
 .It KIOCGKEY
 Get key station translation. The argument is of type
diff --git a/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/le.4 b/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/le.4
index f640a6b7c06..41b23dceb97 100644
--- a/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/le.4
+++ b/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/le.4
@@ -35,7 +35,7 @@
 .\"
 .\"	from: Header: le.4,v 1.2 92/10/13 05:31:33 leres Exp
 .\"	from: @(#)le.4	8.1 (Berkeley) 6/9/93
-.\"	$Id: le.4,v 1.9 1999/05/16 19:57:21 alex Exp $
+.\"	$Id: le.4,v 1.10 1999/07/09 13:35:42 aaron Exp $
 .\"
 .Dd June 9, 1993
 .Dt LE 4 sparc
@@ -51,7 +51,7 @@
 .Cd "le0 at ledma0                           " Pq "sun4m onboard"
 .Cd "le0 at obio0 addr 0xf9000000 level 6    " Pq sun4/300
 .Sh DESCRIPTION
-The 
+The
 .Nm
 interface provides access to the 10 Mb/s
 .Tn Ethernet
diff --git a/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/ms.4 b/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/ms.4
index ba87e48a24e..68ea1a32573 100644
--- a/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/ms.4
+++ b/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/ms.4
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-.\"	$OpenBSD: ms.4,v 1.3 1999/05/16 19:57:21 alex Exp $
+.\"	$OpenBSD: ms.4,v 1.4 1999/07/09 13:35:42 aaron Exp $
 .\"	$NetBSD: ms.4,v 1.2 1997/10/08 22:00:12 jtc Exp $
 .\"
 .\" Copyright (c) 1996 The NetBSD Foundation, Inc.
@@ -26,7 +26,7 @@
 .\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE NETBSD FOUNDATION, INC. AND CONTRIBUTORS
 .\" ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED
 .\" TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
-.\" PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED.  IN NO EVENT SHALL THE FOUNDATION OR CONTRIBUTORS 
+.\" PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED.  IN NO EVENT SHALL THE FOUNDATION OR CONTRIBUTORS
 .\" BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
 .\" CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF
 .\" SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
diff --git a/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/qe.4 b/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/qe.4
index 2b2e6080511..626c05d180c 100644
--- a/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/qe.4
+++ b/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/qe.4
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-.\"     $OpenBSD: qe.4,v 1.2 1999/05/16 19:57:21 alex Exp $
+.\"     $OpenBSD: qe.4,v 1.3 1999/07/09 13:35:42 aaron Exp $
 .\"
 .\" Copyright (c) 1998 Jason L. Wright (jason@thought.net)
 .\" All rights reserved.
@@ -20,7 +20,7 @@
 .\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR
 .\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
 .\" WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
-.\" DISCLAIMED.  IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, 
+.\" DISCLAIMED.  IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT,
 .\" INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
 .\" (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR
 .\" SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
@@ -39,13 +39,13 @@
 .Cd "qec* at sbus? slot ? offset ?                 " Pq "sun4c/sun4m"
 .Cd "qe* at qec?                                   " Pq "sun4c/sun4m"
 .Sh DESCRIPTION
-The 
+The
 .Nm
 interface provides access to 10Mb/s Ethernet networks via the
 .Tn AMD
 Am79C940 (MACE) Ethernet controller.
-The 
-.Nm 
+The
+.Nm
 is found on the Sun QuadEthernet boards
 (Sun part number SUNW,595-3198).
 .Pp
diff --git a/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/qec.4 b/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/qec.4
index a42bb33015e..e52c38fb063 100644
--- a/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/qec.4
+++ b/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/qec.4
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-.\"     $OpenBSD: qec.4,v 1.8 1999/05/16 19:57:22 alex Exp $
+.\"     $OpenBSD: qec.4,v 1.9 1999/07/09 13:35:42 aaron Exp $
 .\"
 .\" Copyright (c) 1998 Jason L. Wright (jason@thought.net)
 .\" All rights reserved.
@@ -20,7 +20,7 @@
 .\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR
 .\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
 .\" WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
-.\" DISCLAIMED.  IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, 
+.\" DISCLAIMED.  IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT,
 .\" INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
 .\" (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR
 .\" SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
@@ -38,7 +38,7 @@
 .Sh SYNOPSIS
 .Cd "qec* at sbus? slot ? offset ?                 " Pq "sun4c/sun4m"
 .Sh DESCRIPTION
-The 
+The
 .Nm
 driver is an sbus controller that can contain either one
 .Xr be 4
diff --git a/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/si.4 b/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/si.4
index d7d15b9c7bc..1627ac8e3bb 100644
--- a/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/si.4
+++ b/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/si.4
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
-.\"	$OpenBSD: si.4,v 1.2 1999/05/16 19:57:22 alex Exp $
+.\"	$OpenBSD: si.4,v 1.3 1999/07/09 13:35:42 aaron Exp $
 .\"
-.\" Copyright (c) 1998 The OpenBSD Project 
+.\" Copyright (c) 1998 The OpenBSD Project
 .\" All rights reserved.
 .\"
 .\"
@@ -8,15 +8,15 @@
 .Dt SI 4 sparc
 .Os
 .Sh NAME
-.Nm si 
+.Nm si
 .Nd NCR 5380 "Sun SCSI 3" VME SCSI controller
 .Sh SYNOPSIS
 .Cd "si0     at vmes0 addr 0xff200000 level 3 vect 0x40           " Pq sun4
 .Cd "si0     at vmes0 addr 0xff200000 level 3 vect 0x40 flags 0x07" Pq sun4
 .Sh DESCRIPTION
-The 
+The
 .Nm
-is a VME SCSI controller based on the NCR 5380 chip, found in sun3 and sun4 
+is a VME SCSI controller based on the NCR 5380 chip, found in sun3 and sun4
 systems with the VME bus.
 .Sh DEVICE FLAGS
 .Bl -tag -width speaker -compact
@@ -28,8 +28,8 @@ Use DMA completion interrupts
 Allow disconnect/reconnect
 .El
 .Pp
-The 
-.Nm 
+The
+.Nm
 device flags may be OR'd together to enable any combination of
 the features listed above.  If no flags are specified, the device will
 use DMA by default.
@@ -38,6 +38,6 @@ use DMA by default.
 .Xr esp 4 ,
 .Xr sw 4
 .Sh HISTORY
-The 
+The
 .Nm
-driver first appeared in NetBSD. 
+driver first appeared in NetBSD.
diff --git a/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/spif.4 b/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/spif.4
index cb4c12d8025..6fd861c1cac 100644
--- a/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/spif.4
+++ b/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/spif.4
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-.\"     $OpenBSD: spif.4,v 1.2 1999/02/04 04:08:55 jason Exp $
+.\"     $OpenBSD: spif.4,v 1.3 1999/07/09 13:35:42 aaron Exp $
 .\"
 .\" Copyright (c) 1999 Jason L. Wright (jason@thought.net)
 .\" All rights reserved.
@@ -20,7 +20,7 @@
 .\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR
 .\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
 .\" WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
-.\" DISCLAIMED.  IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, 
+.\" DISCLAIMED.  IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT,
 .\" INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
 .\" (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR
 .\" SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
@@ -40,7 +40,7 @@
 .Cd "stty* at spif?                                " Pq "sun4c/sun4m"
 .Cd "sbpp* at spif?                                " Pq "sun4c/sun4m"
 .Sh DESCRIPTION
-The 
+The
 .Nm spif
 driver provides support for the Sun Serial/Parallel Interface card
 (Sun part number 501-1931)
@@ -90,7 +90,7 @@ Serial ports
 Parallel ports
 .El
 .Sh SEE ALSO
-.Xr read 2 , 
+.Xr read 2 ,
 .Xr termios 4 ,
 .Xr tty 4
 .Sh AUTHORS
diff --git a/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/sw.4 b/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/sw.4
index 1bf748024ff..1f0f7b65b5a 100644
--- a/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/sw.4
+++ b/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/sw.4
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
-.\"	$OpenBSD: sw.4,v 1.2 1999/05/16 19:57:22 alex Exp $
+.\"	$OpenBSD: sw.4,v 1.3 1999/07/09 13:35:42 aaron Exp $
 .\"
-.\" Copyright (c) 1998 The OpenBSD Project 
+.\" Copyright (c) 1998 The OpenBSD Project
 .\" All rights reserved.
 .\"
 .\"
@@ -8,17 +8,17 @@
 .Dt SW 4 sparc
 .Os
 .Sh NAME
-.Nm sw 
+.Nm sw
 .Nd NCR 5380 "SCSI Weird" Sun 4/100 on-board SCSI controller
 .Sh SYNOPSIS
 .Cd "sw0     at obio0 addr 0x0a000000 level 3" Pq sun4/100
 .Sh DESCRIPTION
-The 
+The
 .Nm
-is the Sun 4/100 on-board SCSI controller based on the NCR 5380 chip, found 
-only on Sun 4/100 workstations.  The 
-.Nm 
-driver is actually implemented as part of the 
+is the Sun 4/100 on-board SCSI controller based on the NCR 5380 chip, found
+only on Sun 4/100 workstations.  The
+.Nm
+driver is actually implemented as part of the
 .Xr si 4
 driver.
 .Sh DEVICE FLAGS
@@ -31,19 +31,19 @@ Use DMA completion interrupts
 Allow disconnect/reconnect
 .El
 .Pp
-The 
-.Nm 
+The
+.Nm
 device flags may be OR'd together to enable any combination of
 the features listed above.  If no flags are specified, the device will
 use polled DMA by default.
 .Sh BUGS
-The 
-.Nm 
+The
+.Nm
 driver only supports polled DMA at this time.
 .Sh SEE ALSO
 .Xr esp 4 ,
 .Xr si 4
 .Sh HISTORY
-The 
+The
 .Nm
-driver first appeared in NetBSD. 
+driver first appeared in NetBSD.
diff --git a/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/tcx.4 b/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/tcx.4
index 0c07346a87a..ad6d16e85bd 100644
--- a/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/tcx.4
+++ b/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/tcx.4
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-.\"	$OpenBSD: tcx.4,v 1.5 1999/05/16 19:57:23 alex Exp $
+.\"	$OpenBSD: tcx.4,v 1.6 1999/07/09 13:35:42 aaron Exp $
 .\"	$NetBSD: tcx.4,v 1.3 1997/10/08 22:00:14 jtc Exp $
 .\"
 .\" Copyright (c) 1996 The NetBSD Foundation, Inc.
@@ -26,7 +26,7 @@
 .\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE NETBSD FOUNDATION, INC. AND CONTRIBUTORS
 .\" ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED
 .\" TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
-.\" PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED.  IN NO EVENT SHALL THE FOUNDATION OR CONTRIBUTORS 
+.\" PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED.  IN NO EVENT SHALL THE FOUNDATION OR CONTRIBUTORS
 .\" BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
 .\" CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF
 .\" SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
@@ -44,7 +44,7 @@
 .Sh SYNOPSIS
 .Cd "tcx* at sbus? slot ? offset ?"
 .Sh DESCRIPTION
-The 
+The
 .Nm tcx
 is a memory based color frame buffer, with graphics acceleration and
 overlay capabilities. Its control registers, colour lookup table and
diff --git a/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/xbox.4 b/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/xbox.4
index f97f15cdbad..f34916bdb2d 100644
--- a/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/xbox.4
+++ b/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/xbox.4
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-.\"     $OpenBSD: xbox.4,v 1.1 1999/04/18 12:36:58 jason Exp $
+.\"     $OpenBSD: xbox.4,v 1.2 1999/07/09 13:35:43 aaron Exp $
 .\"
 .\" Copyright (c) 1999 Jason L. Wright (jason@thought.net)
 .\" All rights reserved.
@@ -20,7 +20,7 @@
 .\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR
 .\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
 .\" WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
-.\" DISCLAIMED.  IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, 
+.\" DISCLAIMED.  IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT,
 .\" INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
 .\" (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR
 .\" SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
@@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
 .Cd "xbox*   at sbus? slot ? offset ?              " Pq "sun4c/sun4m"
 .Cd "sbus*   at xbox?"
 .Sh DESCRIPTION
-The 
+The
 .Nm
 driver provides support for the Sun SBus Expansion Subsystem.
 This device consists of an SBus card and a chassis which has
diff --git a/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/xd.4 b/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/xd.4
index 4a35b48e683..162c3e92bb7 100644
--- a/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/xd.4
+++ b/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/xd.4
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
-.\"	$OpenBSD: xd.4,v 1.2 1998/03/08 01:16:09 johns Exp $
+.\"	$OpenBSD: xd.4,v 1.3 1999/07/09 13:35:42 aaron Exp $
 .\"
-.\" Copyright (c) 1998 The OpenBSD Project 
+.\" Copyright (c) 1998 The OpenBSD Project
 .\" All rights reserved.
 .\"
 .\"
@@ -8,7 +8,7 @@
 .Dt XD 4 sparc
 .Os
 .Sh NAME
-.Nm xd 
+.Nm xd
 .Nd Xylogics 753 or 7053 VME SMD disk controller driver
 .Sh SYNOPSIS
 .Cd "xdc0    at vmel0 addr 0xffffee80 level 3 vect 0x44" Pq sun4
@@ -17,17 +17,17 @@
 .Cd "xdc3    at vmel0 addr 0xffffeeb0 level 3 vect 0x47" Pq sun4
 .Cd "xd*     at xdc? drive ?                           " Pq sun4
 .Sh DESCRIPTION
-The 
+The
 .Nm
 is a Xylogics 753 or 7053 SMD disk controller found on sun4 systems with
 the VME bus.  The Xylogics 753 and 7053 are programmed the same way, but
 are different sizes.  The 753 is a 6U VME card, while the 7053 is a 9U
-VME card.  
+VME card.
 .Sh SEE ALSO
 .Xr xy 4
 .Sh HISTORY
-The 
+The
 .Nm
-driver first appeared in NetBSD and was written by 
+driver first appeared in NetBSD and was written by
 .br
 Charles D. Cranor.
diff --git a/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/xy.4 b/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/xy.4
index 9984412ebf0..2086817d231 100644
--- a/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/xy.4
+++ b/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/xy.4
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
-.\"	$OpenBSD: xy.4,v 1.2 1998/03/08 01:16:11 johns Exp $
+.\"	$OpenBSD: xy.4,v 1.3 1999/07/09 13:35:42 aaron Exp $
 .\"
-.\" Copyright (c) 1998 The OpenBSD Project 
+.\" Copyright (c) 1998 The OpenBSD Project
 .\" All rights reserved.
 .\"
 .\"
@@ -8,22 +8,22 @@
 .Dt XY 4 sparc
 .Os
 .Sh NAME
-.Nm xy 
+.Nm xy
 .Nd Xylogics 450 or 451 VME SMD disk controller driver
 .Sh SYNOPSIS
 .Cd "xyc0    at vmes0 addr 0xffffee40 level 3 vect 0x48" Pq sun4
 .Cd "xyc1    at vmes0 addr 0xffffee48 level 3 vect 0x49" Pq sun4
 .Cd "xy*     at xyc? drive ?                           " Pq sun4
 .Sh DESCRIPTION
-The 
+The
 .Nm
 is a Xylogics 450/451 SMD disk controller found on sun4 systems with
-the VME bus. 
+the VME bus.
 .Sh SEE ALSO
 .Xr xd 4
 .Sh HISTORY
-The 
+The
 .Nm
-driver first appeared in NetBSD and was written by 
+driver first appeared in NetBSD and was written by
 .br
 Charles D. Cranor.
diff --git a/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/zs.4 b/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/zs.4
index a5c0b447bbc..f4733a6aa8a 100644
--- a/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/zs.4
+++ b/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/zs.4
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
-.\"	$OpenBSD: zs.4,v 1.5 1999/05/16 19:57:23 alex Exp $
+.\"	$OpenBSD: zs.4,v 1.6 1999/07/09 13:35:42 aaron Exp $
 .\"
-.\" Copyright (c) 1998 The OpenBSD Project 
+.\" Copyright (c) 1998 The OpenBSD Project
 .\" All rights reserved.
 .\"
 .\"
@@ -8,7 +8,7 @@
 .Dt ZS 4 sparc
 .Os
 .Sh NAME
-.Nm zs 
+.Nm zs
 .Nd Zilog 8530 (ZSCC) serial communications driver
 .Sh SYNOPSIS
 .Cd "zs0 at mainbus0                                  " Pq sun4c
@@ -21,15 +21,15 @@
 .Cd "zs1 at obio0 addr 0x00000000 level 12 flags 0x103" Pq sun4/100
 .Cd "zs2 at obio0 addr 0xe0000000 level 12 flags 0x103" Pq sun4/300
 .Sh DESCRIPTION
-The 
+The
 .Nm
 is a Zilog 8530 serial interface chip used in Sun workstations.
-The Zilog 8530 provides two input/output channels per instance. 
+The Zilog 8530 provides two input/output channels per instance.
 Most Sun workstations include two of these interfaces.  One of the
 interfaces is hardwired for use by the keyboard and mouse attached to
-the workstation console.  
+the workstation console.
 The remaining additional
-.Nm 
+.Nm
 interfaces provide RS-423
 and RS-232 serial ports for general purpose use.
 .Pp
@@ -39,13 +39,13 @@ driver supports all of the standard
 .Xr tty 4
 ioctl calls.
 The status of the DTR, RTS, CTS, and DCD signals can be queried with
-TIOCMGET command, but, due to limitations in the hardware, 
+TIOCMGET command, but, due to limitations in the hardware,
 only the DTR and RTS signals can be modified with TIOCMSET, TIOCMBIC,
 and TIOCMBIS
 .Xr ioctl 2
 commands.
 .Sh BUGS
-The 
+The
 .Nm
 driver now supports cua minor devices, but with this known deficiency
 in the simultaneous outgoing/incoming aspect of the driver:
@@ -58,9 +58,9 @@ prevents the cua device from being re-opened.
 .Xr ms 4 ,
 .Xr tty 4
 .Sh HISTORY
-The 
+The
 .Nm
-driver first appeared in 
+driver first appeared in
 .Bx 4.4 .
 Support for the TIOCM* ioctl's appeared in
 .Ox 2.3 .
diff --git a/share/man/man4/man4.sun3/bwtwo.4 b/share/man/man4/man4.sun3/bwtwo.4
index be67b7fd38e..21d33550086 100644
--- a/share/man/man4/man4.sun3/bwtwo.4
+++ b/share/man/man4/man4.sun3/bwtwo.4
@@ -46,7 +46,7 @@
 .Sh SYNOPSIS
 .Cd "bwtwo0 at obmem0 addr ?"
 .Sh DESCRIPTION
-The 
+The
 .Nm
 is a memory based black and white frame buffer.
 It supports the minimal ioctl's needed to run X11.
diff --git a/share/man/man4/man4.sun3/cgfour.4 b/share/man/man4/man4.sun3/cgfour.4
index 4644f024194..a2a33429ac3 100644
--- a/share/man/man4/man4.sun3/cgfour.4
+++ b/share/man/man4/man4.sun3/cgfour.4
@@ -46,7 +46,7 @@
 .Sh SYNOPSIS
 .Cd "cgfour0 at obmem0 addr ?"
 .Sh DESCRIPTION
-The 
+The
 .Nm
 is a memory based color frame buffer.
 It supports the minimal ioctl's needed to run X11.
diff --git a/share/man/man4/man4.sun3/cgtwo.4 b/share/man/man4/man4.sun3/cgtwo.4
index f6cdb09db45..d809db93f0d 100644
--- a/share/man/man4/man4.sun3/cgtwo.4
+++ b/share/man/man4/man4.sun3/cgtwo.4
@@ -46,7 +46,7 @@
 .Sh SYNOPSIS
 .Cd "cgtwo0 at vmes0 addr 0xff400000 level 4 vect 0xA8"
 .Sh DESCRIPTION
-The 
+The
 .Nm
 is a memory based color frame buffer.
 It supports the minimal ioctl's needed to run X11.
diff --git a/share/man/man4/man4.sun3/ie.4 b/share/man/man4/man4.sun3/ie.4
index 04fdad6fc5b..e2f9b632bd4 100644
--- a/share/man/man4/man4.sun3/ie.4
+++ b/share/man/man4/man4.sun3/ie.4
@@ -47,7 +47,7 @@
 .Cd "ie0 at obio0 addr ? level ?"
 .Cd "ie1 at vmes0 addr 0xffe88000 level 3 vect 0x75"
 .Sh DESCRIPTION
-The 
+The
 .Nm
 interface provides access to the 10 Mb/s Ethernet network via the
 .Tn Intel
diff --git a/share/man/man4/man4.sun3/le.4 b/share/man/man4/man4.sun3/le.4
index 956674aef5d..573d931725c 100644
--- a/share/man/man4/man4.sun3/le.4
+++ b/share/man/man4/man4.sun3/le.4
@@ -46,7 +46,7 @@
 .Sh SYNOPSIS
 .Cd "le* at obio0 addr ? level ?"
 .Sh DESCRIPTION
-The 
+The
 .Nm
 interface provides access to the 10 Mb/s Ethernet network via the
 .Tn AMD
diff --git a/share/man/man4/man4.vax/mtio.4 b/share/man/man4/man4.vax/mtio.4
index 659aaca8847..18b60e9aba8 100644
--- a/share/man/man4/man4.vax/mtio.4
+++ b/share/man/man4/man4.vax/mtio.4
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-.\"	$OpenBSD: mtio.4,v 1.5 1999/05/16 19:57:32 alex Exp $
+.\"	$OpenBSD: mtio.4,v 1.6 1999/07/09 13:35:39 aaron Exp $
 .\"	$NetBSD: mtio.4,v 1.4 1996/03/03 17:13:54 thorpej Exp $
 .\"
 .\" Copyright (c) 1983, 1991 The Regents of the University of California.
@@ -88,7 +88,7 @@ When the device last number is between
 .Em 0-7
 the device will operate at 800
 .Tn BPI
-(or its lowest density), between 
+(or its lowest density), between
 .Em 8-15
 it will operate at 1600
 .Tn BPI
diff --git a/share/man/man4/man4.vax/tmscp.4 b/share/man/man4/man4.vax/tmscp.4
index 7e8a1b8f997..8284d1ff4fe 100644
--- a/share/man/man4/man4.vax/tmscp.4
+++ b/share/man/man4/man4.vax/tmscp.4
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-.\"	$OpenBSD: tmscp.4,v 1.5 1999/05/16 19:57:35 alex Exp $
+.\"	$OpenBSD: tmscp.4,v 1.6 1999/07/09 13:35:40 aaron Exp $
 .\"	$NetBSD: tmscp.4,v 1.4 1996/03/03 17:14:06 thorpej Exp $
 .\"
 .\" Copyright (c) 1986, 1991 Regents of the University of California.
@@ -55,14 +55,14 @@ such as the
 .Tn TU81
 and the
 .Tn TK50
-provide a standard tape drive interface 
+provide a standard tape drive interface
 as described in
 .Xr mtio 4 .
 The controller communicates with the host through a packet
 oriented protocol.
 Consult the file
 .Aq Pa vax/tmscp.h
-for a detailed 
+for a detailed
 description of this protocol.
 .Sh DIAGNOSTICS
 .Bl -diag
diff --git a/share/man/man4/midi.4 b/share/man/man4/midi.4
index 2f52897b8a3..e8e18126f88 100644
--- a/share/man/man4/midi.4
+++ b/share/man/man4/midi.4
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-.\" $OpenBSD: midi.4,v 1.2 1999/05/16 19:56:30 alex Exp $
+.\" $OpenBSD: midi.4,v 1.3 1999/07/09 13:35:48 aaron Exp $
 .\" $NetBSD: midi.4,v 1.4 1998/08/22 14:45:35 augustss Exp $
 .\" Copyright (c) 1997 The NetBSD Foundation, Inc.
 .\" All rights reserved.
@@ -23,7 +23,7 @@
 .\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE NETBSD FOUNDATION, INC. AND CONTRIBUTORS
 .\" ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED
 .\" TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
-.\" PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED.  IN NO EVENT SHALL THE FOUNDATION OR CONTRIBUTORS 
+.\" PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED.  IN NO EVENT SHALL THE FOUNDATION OR CONTRIBUTORS
 .\" BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
 .\" CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF
 .\" SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
@@ -73,13 +73,13 @@ a simple patchboard for MIDI devices.  For example, a MIDI keyboard could
 be connected to a synthesizer by the command
 .Cd "cat -u /dev/rmidi1 >/dev/rmidi2"
 .Pp
-The 
+The
 .Pa /dev/music
 device is a MIDI sequencer device.  Data sent to and from this device
 not only contains the information sent to the MIDI device, but also
 timing information.  The kernel will make sure that data is sent
 to the physical device at the indicated time.  The sequencer device
-uses the 
+uses the
 .Pa /dev/midiN
 devices internally and they are unavailable when used by the sequencer.
 .Pp
diff --git a/share/man/man4/mtdphy.4 b/share/man/man4/mtdphy.4
index e3473451170..82efc304a96 100644
--- a/share/man/man4/mtdphy.4
+++ b/share/man/man4/mtdphy.4
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-.\"     $OpenBSD: mtdphy.4,v 1.2 1999/06/05 13:18:34 aaron Exp $
+.\"     $OpenBSD: mtdphy.4,v 1.3 1999/07/09 13:35:48 aaron Exp $
 .\"
 .\" Copyright (c) 1998 Jason L. Wright (jason@thought.net)
 .\" All rights reserved.
@@ -20,7 +20,7 @@
 .\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR
 .\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
 .\" WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
-.\" DISCLAIMED.  IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, 
+.\" DISCLAIMED.  IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT,
 .\" INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
 .\" (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR
 .\" SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
diff --git a/share/man/man4/mtio.4 b/share/man/man4/mtio.4
index a4786f5eaf0..94e980fb742 100644
--- a/share/man/man4/mtio.4
+++ b/share/man/man4/mtio.4
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-.\"	$OpenBSD: mtio.4,v 1.4 1999/07/03 02:11:12 aaron Exp $
+.\"	$OpenBSD: mtio.4,v 1.5 1999/07/09 13:35:46 aaron Exp $
 .\"	$NetBSD: mtio.4,v 1.4 1996/03/03 17:13:54 thorpej Exp $
 .\"
 .\" Copyright (c) 1983, 1991 The Regents of the University of California.
@@ -60,7 +60,7 @@ When the device last number is between
 .Em 0-7
 the device will operate at 800
 .Tn BPI
-(or its lowest density), between 
+(or its lowest density), between
 .Em 8-15
 it will operate at 1600
 .Tn BPI
diff --git a/share/man/man4/ncr.4 b/share/man/man4/ncr.4
index c3f5dbeac99..3ab132e30e1 100644
--- a/share/man/man4/ncr.4
+++ b/share/man/man4/ncr.4
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-.\"	$OpenBSD: ncr.4,v 1.2 1999/05/16 19:56:31 alex Exp $
+.\"	$OpenBSD: ncr.4,v 1.3 1999/07/09 13:35:46 aaron Exp $
 .\"
 .\" Copyright (c) 1994 James A. Jegers
 .\" All rights reserved.
@@ -10,7 +10,7 @@
 .\"    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
 .\" 2. The name of the author may not be used to endorse or promote products
 .\"    derived from this software without specific prior written permission
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR
 .\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES
 .\" OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED.
diff --git a/share/man/man4/ne.4 b/share/man/man4/ne.4
index cdb238ff238..43afd9aae22 100644
--- a/share/man/man4/ne.4
+++ b/share/man/man4/ne.4
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-.\"	$OpenBSD: ne.4,v 1.2 1999/06/05 13:18:34 aaron Exp $	
+.\"	$OpenBSD: ne.4,v 1.3 1999/07/09 13:35:46 aaron Exp $
 .\"	$NetBSD: ne.4,v 1.4 1998/02/22 05:21:20 enami Exp $
 .\"
 .\" Copyright (c) 1997 The NetBSD Foundation, Inc.
diff --git a/share/man/man4/netintro.4 b/share/man/man4/netintro.4
index d622cde32f1..aac58f3d305 100644
--- a/share/man/man4/netintro.4
+++ b/share/man/man4/netintro.4
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-.\"	$OpenBSD: netintro.4,v 1.14 1999/07/02 20:11:49 aaron Exp $
+.\"	$OpenBSD: netintro.4,v 1.15 1999/07/09 13:35:47 aaron Exp $
 .\"	$NetBSD: netintro.4,v 1.4 1995/10/19 08:03:40 jtc Exp $
 .\"
 .\" Copyright (c) 1983, 1990, 1991, 1993
@@ -59,8 +59,8 @@ All network protocols are associated with a specific
 .Em protocol family .
 A protocol family provides basic services to the protocol
 implementation to allow it to function within a specific
-network environment.  These services may include 
-packet fragmentation and reassembly, routing, addressing, and 
+network environment.  These services may include
+packet fragmentation and reassembly, routing, addressing, and
 basic transport.  A protocol family may support multiple
 methods of addressing, though the current protocol implementations
 do not.  A protocol family is normally comprised of a number
@@ -68,7 +68,7 @@ of protocols, one per
 .Xr socket 2
 type.  It is not required that a protocol family support
 all socket types.  A protocol family may contain multiple
-protocols supporting the same socket abstraction. 
+protocols supporting the same socket abstraction.
 .Pp
 A protocol supports one of the socket abstractions detailed in
 .Xr socket 2 .
@@ -180,7 +180,7 @@ certain interfaces such as the loopback interface,
 .Xr lo 4 ,
 do not.
 .Pp
-The following 
+The following
 .Xr ioctl
 calls may be used to manipulate network interfaces.
 The
@@ -188,7 +188,7 @@ The
 is made on a socket (typically of type
 .Dv SOCK_DGRAM )
 in the desired domain.
-Most of the requests supported in earlier releases 
+Most of the requests supported in earlier releases
 take an
 .Ar ifreq
 structure as its parameter.  This structure has the form
@@ -294,10 +294,10 @@ the address family in which the original socket was opened.
 .It Dv SIOCGIFCONF
 Get interface configuration list.  This request takes an
 .Ar ifconf
-structure (see below) as a value-result parameter.  The 
+structure (see below) as a value-result parameter.  The
 .Ar ifc_len
 field should be initially set to the size of the buffer
-pointed to by 
+pointed to by
 .Ar ifc_buf .
 On return it will contain the length, in bytes, of the
 configuration list.  Alternately, if the
diff --git a/share/man/man4/ns.4 b/share/man/man4/ns.4
index 632a04abf1a..ca3c59a2420 100644
--- a/share/man/man4/ns.4
+++ b/share/man/man4/ns.4
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-.\"	$OpenBSD: ns.4,v 1.5 1999/06/05 13:18:32 aaron Exp $
+.\"	$OpenBSD: ns.4,v 1.6 1999/07/09 13:35:47 aaron Exp $
 .\"	$NetBSD: ns.4,v 1.3 1994/11/30 16:22:26 jtc Exp $
 .\"
 .\" Copyright (c) 1985, 1991, 1993
@@ -51,7 +51,7 @@ protocol family is a collection of protocols
 layered atop the
 .Em Internet  Datagram  Protocol
 .Pq Tn IDP
-transport layer, and using the Xerox 
+transport layer, and using the Xerox
 .Tn NS
 address formats.
 The
@@ -67,13 +67,13 @@ entering, (or with toggling kernel variable, additionally leaving) the local
 host.
 .Sh ADDRESSING
 .Tn NS
-addresses are 12 byte quantities, consisting of a 
+addresses are 12 byte quantities, consisting of a
 4 byte Network number, a 6 byte Host number and a 2 byte port number,
 all stored in network standard format.
 (on the
 .Tn VAX
 these are word and byte reversed; on the
-.Tn SUN 
+.Tn SUN
 they are not
 reversed).  The include file
 .Aq Pa netns/ns.h
diff --git a/share/man/man4/nsip.4 b/share/man/man4/nsip.4
index 456f277a4db..ca886d0ade5 100644
--- a/share/man/man4/nsip.4
+++ b/share/man/man4/nsip.4
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-.\"	$OpenBSD: nsip.4,v 1.4 1999/06/05 13:18:32 aaron Exp $
+.\"	$OpenBSD: nsip.4,v 1.5 1999/07/09 13:35:47 aaron Exp $
 .\"	$NetBSD: nsip.4,v 1.3 1994/11/30 16:22:27 jtc Exp $
 .\"
 .\" Copyright (c) 1985, 1991, 1993
@@ -122,7 +122,7 @@ should be a clue
 to remove that partner.
 This was intended to postpone the necessity of rewriting reverse
 .Tn ARP
-for the 
+for the
 .Xr en 4
 device, and to allow passing
 .Tn XNS
diff --git a/share/man/man4/opl.4 b/share/man/man4/opl.4
index 6437aee5dd7..e869f43a573 100644
--- a/share/man/man4/opl.4
+++ b/share/man/man4/opl.4
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-.\" $OpenBSD: opl.4,v 1.1 1999/01/07 22:32:57 niklas Exp $
+.\" $OpenBSD: opl.4,v 1.2 1999/07/09 13:35:48 aaron Exp $
 .\" $NetBSD: opl.4,v 1.3 1998/09/08 11:59:48 augustss Exp $
 .\" Copyright (c) 1997 The NetBSD Foundation, Inc.
 .\" All rights reserved.
@@ -23,7 +23,7 @@
 .\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE NETBSD FOUNDATION, INC. AND CONTRIBUTORS
 .\" ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED
 .\" TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
-.\" PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED.  IN NO EVENT SHALL THE FOUNDATION OR CONTRIBUTORS 
+.\" PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED.  IN NO EVENT SHALL THE FOUNDATION OR CONTRIBUTORS
 .\" BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
 .\" CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF
 .\" SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
diff --git a/share/man/man4/options.4 b/share/man/man4/options.4
index 61fcfd83788..26bec57094b 100644
--- a/share/man/man4/options.4
+++ b/share/man/man4/options.4
@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
-.\"	$OpenBSD: options.4,v 1.36 1999/07/07 10:50:10 aaron Exp $
+.\"	$OpenBSD: options.4,v 1.37 1999/07/09 13:35:47 aaron Exp $
 .\"	$NetBSD: options.4,v 1.21 1997/06/25 03:13:00 thorpej Exp $
 .\"
-.\" Copyright (c) 1998 Theo de Raadt 
+.\" Copyright (c) 1998 Theo de Raadt
 .\" Copyright (c) 1998 Todd Miller
 .\" Copyright (c) 1998 Gene Skonicki
 .\" Copyright (c) 1996
@@ -156,7 +156,7 @@ It also enables support for some older pre BSD 4.4 socket calls.
 .It Cd option DDB
 Compiles in a kernel debugger for diagnosing kernel problems. See
 .Xr ddb 4
-for details. 
+for details.
 .Em NOTE:
 not available on all architectures.
 .It Cd option KGDB
@@ -165,7 +165,7 @@ using the
 .Dq remote target
 feature of gdb. See
 .Xr gdb 1
-for details. 
+for details.
 .Em NOTE:
 not available on all architectures.
 .It Cd makeoptions DEBUG="-g"
@@ -178,7 +178,7 @@ is useful for debugging kernel crash dumps with gdb.
 Note that
 .Xr gdb Ns 's
 .Fl k
-flag 
+flag
 is obsolete and should not be used. Instead, the kernel can be debugged
 by starting
 .Xr gdb
@@ -193,7 +193,7 @@ This also turns on
 Turns on miscellaneous kernel debugging. Since options are turned into
 preprocessor defines (see above),
 .Em option DEBUG
-is equivalent to doing a 
+is equivalent to doing a
 .Em #define DEBUG
 throughout the kernel. Much of the kernel has
 .Em #ifdef DEBUG
@@ -210,7 +210,7 @@ code will cause the kernel to panic if corruption of internal data
 structures is detected.
 .It Cd option GPROF
 Adds code to the kernel for kernel profiling with
-.Xr kgmon 8 . 
+.Xr kgmon 8 .
 .It Cd makeoptions PROF="-pg"
 The -pg flag causes the kernel to be compiled with support for profiling.
 The
@@ -233,7 +233,7 @@ Includes code implementing the Second Extended File System
 .Em ( EXT2FS ) .
 This is the most commonly used file system on the Linux operating system,
 and is provided here for compatibility.  Some specific features of
-.Em EXT2FS 
+.Em EXT2FS
 like the "behavior on errors" are not implemented.  This file system
 can't be used with uid_t or gid_t values greater than 65535.  Also, the
 filesystem will not function correctly on architectures with differing
@@ -259,7 +259,7 @@ Include the client side of the
 Although the bulk of the code implementing
 .Em NFS
 is kernel based, several user level daemons are needed for it to
-work.  See 
+work.  See
 .Xr mount_nfs 8
 and
 .Xr nfsiod 8
@@ -274,7 +274,7 @@ for details.
 Includes support for the
 .Tn MS-DOS
 FAT file system.
-The kernel also implements the 
+The kernel also implements the
 .Tn Windows 95
 extensions which permit the use of longer, mixed-case file names.
 See
@@ -367,10 +367,10 @@ Include the server side of the
 Although the bulk of the code implementing
 .Em NFS
 is kernel based, several user level daemons are needed for it to
-work. See 
+work. See
 .Xr mountd 8
 and
-.Xr nfsd 8 
+.Xr nfsd 8
 for details.
 .It Cd option QUOTA
 Enables kernel support for file system quotas. See
@@ -383,7 +383,7 @@ for details. Note that quotas only work on
 .Dq ffs
 file systems, although
 .Xr rpc.rquotad 8
-permits them to be accessed over 
+permits them to be accessed over
 .Em NFS .
 .It Cd option FIFO
 Adds support for
@@ -409,7 +409,7 @@ the namei cache.
 .It Cd option EXT2FS_SYSTEM_FLAGS
 This option changes the behavior of the APPEND and IMMUTABLE flags
 for a file on an
-.Em EXT2FS 
+.Em EXT2FS
 filesystem. Without this option, the superuser or owner of the file
 can set and clear them.  With this option, only the superuser can set
 them, and they can't be cleared if the securelevel is greater than 0.
@@ -473,7 +473,7 @@ each component buffer.  It defaults to 8.
 The kernel memory allocator,
 .Xr malloc 9 ,
 will keep statistics on its performance if this option is enabled.
-Unfortunately, this option therefore essentially disables 
+Unfortunately, this option therefore essentially disables
 .Fn MALLOC
 and
 .Fn FREE
@@ -496,9 +496,9 @@ option.
 .Ss Networking Options
 .Bl -ohang
 .It Cd option GATEWAY
-Enables 
+Enables
 .Em IPFORWARDING
-and (on most ports) increases the size of 
+and (on most ports) increases the size of
 .Em NMBCLUSTERS.
 In general,
 .Em GATEWAY
@@ -547,7 +547,7 @@ BSD networking stack keeps network packets in a linked list, or chain,
 of kernel buffer objects called mbufs.  The system provides larger mbuf
 clusters as an optimization for large packets, instead of using long
 chains for large packets.  The mbuf cluster size, or
-.Em MCLBYTES, 
+.Em MCLBYTES,
 must be a power of two, and is computed as two raised to the power
 .Em MCLSHIFT.
 On systems with Ethernet network adaptors,
@@ -578,7 +578,7 @@ use by
 .It Cd option NETATALK
 Include kernel support for the AppleTalk family of protocols.  This suite
 of supporting code is sometimes called
-.Em netatalk 
+.Em netatalk
 support.
 .It Cd option TCP_COMPAT_42
 Use of this option is
@@ -617,14 +617,14 @@ together with
 .Em TCP_NEWRENO .
 .It Cd option TCP_FACK
 Turns on forward acknowledgements allowing a more precise estimate of
-outstanding data during the fast recovery phase by using 
-.Em SACK 
+outstanding data during the fast recovery phase by using
+.Em SACK
 information. This option can be used together with
 .Em TCP_SACK .
 .It Cd option TCP_SIGNATURE
 Turns on support for the TCP MD5 Signature option (RFC 2385). This is used by
 Internet backdone routers to provide per-packet authentication for the TCP
-packets used to communicate BGP routing information. You will also need a 
+packets used to communicate BGP routing information. You will also need a
 routing daemon that supports this option in order to actually use it.
 .It Cd option IPFILTER
 This option enables the IP filtering on the packet level using
@@ -642,7 +642,7 @@ This option turns on
 .Xr pcap 3
 based filtering for ppp connections. This option is used by
 .Xr pppd 8
-which needs to be compiled with 
+which needs to be compiled with
 .Em PPP_FILTER
 defined (the current default).
 .It Cd option IPSEC
@@ -715,7 +715,7 @@ for the default.
 .It Cd option SWAPPAGER
 Turns on paging.  (To be specific, this enables the virtual memory
 module responsible for handling page faults for
-.Dq anonymous 
+.Dq anonymous
 objects (i.e. BSS pages)).
 .Em MANDATORY
 -- the system cannot actually run without this
@@ -741,7 +741,7 @@ for exact default information.  Increase this value if
 messages appear.
 .It Cd option NKMEMCLUSTERS=value
 Size of kernel malloc area in CLBYTES-sized logical pages.  This area
-is covered by the kernel submap 
+is covered by the kernel submap
 .Em kmem_map .
 See
 .Pa /usr/include/machine/param.h
diff --git a/share/man/man4/pcmcia.4 b/share/man/man4/pcmcia.4
index 1556b308e1e..4415275aa5c 100644
--- a/share/man/man4/pcmcia.4
+++ b/share/man/man4/pcmcia.4
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-.\"	$OpenBSD: pcmcia.4,v 1.3 1999/06/05 13:18:34 aaron Exp $	
+.\"	$OpenBSD: pcmcia.4,v 1.4 1999/07/09 13:35:47 aaron Exp $
 .\"	$NetBSD: pcmcia.4,v 1.4 1998/06/07 09:10:30 enami Exp $
 .\" Copyright (c) 1997 The NetBSD Foundation, Inc.
 .\" All rights reserved.
diff --git a/share/man/man4/pty.4 b/share/man/man4/pty.4
index d4f62cf977f..f7fad90b11b 100644
--- a/share/man/man4/pty.4
+++ b/share/man/man4/pty.4
@@ -55,7 +55,7 @@ device.  The slave device provides to a process
 an interface identical
 to that described in
 .Xr tty 4 .
-However, whereas all other devices which provide the 
+However, whereas all other devices which provide the
 interface described in
 .Xr tty 4
 have a hardware device of some sort behind them, the slave
@@ -72,7 +72,7 @@ is given in
 the specification, that number of pseudo terminal pairs are configured;
 the default count is 32.
 .Pp
-The following 
+The following
 .Xr ioctl 2
 calls apply only to pseudo terminals:
 .Bl -tag -width TIOCREMOTE
@@ -88,12 +88,12 @@ or by typing
 .Ql ^S ) .
 Takes no parameter.
 .It Dv TIOCPKT
-Enable/disable 
+Enable/disable
 .Em packet
 mode.  Packet mode is enabled by specifying (by reference)
 a nonzero parameter and disabled by specifying (by reference)
 a zero parameter.  When applied to the master side of a pseudo
-terminal, each subsequent 
+terminal, each subsequent
 .Xr read
 from the terminal will return data written on the slave part of
 the pseudo terminal preceded by a zero byte (symbolically
@@ -113,11 +113,11 @@ whenever output to the terminal is stopped a la
 .It Dv TIOCPKT_START
 whenever output to the terminal is restarted.
 .It Dv TIOCPKT_DOSTOP
-whenever 
+whenever
 .Em t_stopc
 is
 .Ql ^S
-and 
+and
 .Em t_startc
 is
 .Ql ^Q .
@@ -151,7 +151,7 @@ structure.
 .Pp
 This is used by
 .Xr telnetd 8
-to implement TELNET "line mode" - it allows the 
+to implement TELNET "line mode" - it allows the
 .Xr telnetd 8
 to detect
 .Xr tty 4
@@ -173,7 +173,7 @@ This mode is enabled from the master side of a pseudo terminal
 by specifying (by reference)
 a nonzero parameter and disabled by specifying (by reference)
 a zero parameter.
-Each subsequent 
+Each subsequent
 .Xr read
 from the master side will return data written on the slave part of
 the pseudo terminal preceded by a zero byte,
diff --git a/share/man/man4/raid.4 b/share/man/man4/raid.4
index 54882d1fcc1..98a977f5757 100644
--- a/share/man/man4/raid.4
+++ b/share/man/man4/raid.4
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-.\"	$OpenBSD: raid.4,v 1.5 1999/07/08 09:41:43 hugh Exp $
+.\"	$OpenBSD: raid.4,v 1.6 1999/07/09 13:35:48 aaron Exp $
 .\"
 .\"
 .\" Copyright (c) 1998 The NetBSD Foundation, Inc.
@@ -38,29 +38,29 @@
 .\"
 .\" Copyright (c) 1995 Carnegie-Mellon University.
 .\" All rights reserved.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\" Author: Mark Holland
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\" Permission to use, copy, modify and distribute this software and
 .\" its documentation is hereby granted, provided that both the copyright
 .\" notice and this permission notice appear in all copies of the
 .\" software, derivative works or modified versions, and any portions
 .\" thereof, and that both notices appear in supporting documentation.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\" CARNEGIE MELLON ALLOWS FREE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE IN ITS "AS IS"
 .\" CONDITION.  CARNEGIE MELLON DISCLAIMS ANY LIABILITY OF ANY KIND
 .\" FOR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\" Carnegie Mellon requests users of this software to return to
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\"  Software Distribution Coordinator  or  Software.Distribution@CS.CMU.EDU
 .\"  School of Computer Science
 .\"  Carnegie Mellon University
 .\"  Pittsburgh PA 15213-3890
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\" any improvements or extensions that they make and grant Carnegie the
 .\" rights to redistribute these changes.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .Dd November 9, 1998
 .Dt RAID 4
 .Os
@@ -75,20 +75,20 @@ The
 driver provides RAID 0, 1, 4, and 5 (and more!) capabilities.  This
 document assumes that the reader has at least some familiarity with RAID
 and RAID concepts.  The reader is also assumed to know how to configure
-disks and pseudo-devices into kernels, how to generate kernels, and how 
+disks and pseudo-devices into kernels, how to generate kernels, and how
 to partition disks.
 .Pp
 RAIDframe provides a number of different RAID levels including:
 .Bl -tag -width indent
-.It RAID 0 
+.It RAID 0
 provides simple data striping across the components.
-.It RAID 1 
+.It RAID 1
 provides mirroring.
-.It RAID 4 
+.It RAID 4
 provides data striping across the components, with parity
 stored on a dedicated drive (in this case, the last component).
-.It RAID 5 
-provides data striping across the components, with parity 
+.It RAID 5
+provides data striping across the components, with parity
 distributed across all the components.
 .El
 .Pp
@@ -108,8 +108,8 @@ reconstructed from the data and parity present on the other
 components.  This results in much slower data accesses, but
 does mean that a failure need not bring the system to a complete halt.
 .Pp
-The driver supports 
-.Sq hot spares , 
+The driver supports
+.Sq hot spares ,
 disks which are on-line, but are not
 actively used in an existing filesystem.  Should a disk fail, the
 driver is capable of reconstructing the failed disk onto a hot spare.
@@ -122,39 +122,39 @@ the reconstructed data from the hot spare to the previously failed
 If a component cannot be detected when the RAID device is configured,
 that component will be simply marked as 'failed'.
 .Pp
-The user-land utility for doing all 
+The user-land utility for doing all
 .Nm
 configuration and other operations
-is 
+is
 .Xr raidctl 8 .
-For any of the RAID flavours which have parity data, 
+For any of the RAID flavours which have parity data,
 .Xr raidctl 8
-must be used with the 
+must be used with the
 .Fl r
 option to re-write the data when either a) a new RAID device is
 brought up for the first time or b) after an un-clean shutdown of a
-RAID device.  By performing this on-demand recomputation of all parity 
-before doing a 
+RAID device.  By performing this on-demand recomputation of all parity
+before doing a
 .Xr fsck 8
 or a
 .Xr newfs 8
 filesystem integrity and parity integrity can be ensured.  It bears
-repeating again that parity recomputation is 
+repeating again that parity recomputation is
 .Em required
 before any filesystems are created or used on the RAID device.  If the
 parity is not correct, then missing data cannot be correctly recovered.
 .Pp
-RAID levels may be combined in a hierarchical fashion.  For example, a RAID 0 
-device can be constructed out of a number of RAID 5 devices (which, in turn, 
+RAID levels may be combined in a hierarchical fashion.  For example, a RAID 0
+device can be constructed out of a number of RAID 5 devices (which, in turn,
 may be constructed out of the physical disks, or of other RAID devices).
 .Pp
-At the time of this writing, it is 
+At the time of this writing, it is
 .Em imperative
-that drives be 
+that drives be
 .Sq nailed down
 at their respective addresses (i.e. not left free-floating, where a
-drive with SCSI ID of 4 can end up as /dev/sd0c).  Consider a system 
-with three SCSI drives at SCSI IDs 4, 5, and 6, and which map to 
+drive with SCSI ID of 4 can end up as /dev/sd0c).  Consider a system
+with three SCSI drives at SCSI IDs 4, 5, and 6, and which map to
 components /dev/sd0e, /dev/sd1e, and /dev/sd2e.  If the drive with
 SCSI ID 5 fails,
 and the system reboots, the old /dev/sd2e will show up as /dev/sd1e.
@@ -164,7 +164,7 @@ actually become /dev/sd1e.  Hopefully this will change within a few
 days of this writing with the addition of MD5 checksums to each of the
 components.
 .Pp
-The first step to using the 
+The first step to using the
 .Nm
 driver is to ensure that it is suitably configured in the kernel.  This is
 done by adding a line similar to:
@@ -172,12 +172,12 @@ done by adding a line similar to:
 pseudo-device   raid   4       # RAIDframe disk device
 .Ed
 .Pp
-to the kernel configuration file.  The 
+to the kernel configuration file.  The
 .Sq count
 argument (
 .Sq 4 ,
 in this case), specifies the number of RAIDframe drivers to configure.
-At the time of this writing, 4 is the MAXIMUM of 
+At the time of this writing, 4 is the MAXIMUM of
 .Nm
 devices which are supported.  This will change as soon as kernel threads
 are available.
@@ -187,17 +187,17 @@ In all cases the
 partitions of the disks
 .Pa must not
 be combined.  Rather, each component parition should be offset by at least one
-cylinder from the beginning of that component disk.  This ensures that 
+cylinder from the beginning of that component disk.  This ensures that
 the disklabels for the component disks do not conflict with the
-disklabel for the 
+disklabel for the
 .Nm
 device.
 As well, all component paritions must be of the type
 .Dv FS_BSDFFS .
 .Pp
-A more detailed treatment of actually using a 
+A more detailed treatment of actually using a
 .Nm
-device is found in 
+device is found in
 .Xr raidctl 8 .
 It is highly recommended that the steps to reconstruct, copyback, and
 re-compute parity are well understood by the system administrator(s)
@@ -211,11 +211,11 @@ data loss due to component failure.  However the loss of two
 components of a RAID 4 or 5 system, or the loss of a single component
 of a RAID 0 system, will result in the entire filesystems on that RAID
 device being lost.
-RAID is 
+RAID is
 .Em not
 a substitute for good backup practices.
 .Pp
-Recomputation of parity 
+Recomputation of parity
 .Em must
 be performed whenever there is a chance that it may have been
 compromised.  This includes after system crashes, or before a RAID
@@ -223,7 +223,7 @@ device has been used for the first time.  Failure to keep parity
 correct will be catastrophic should a component ever fail -- it is
 better to use RAID 0 and get the additional space and speed, than it
 is to use parity, but not keep the parity correct.  At least with RAID
-0 there is no perception of increased data security. 
+0 there is no perception of increased data security.
 .Pp
 .Sh FILES
 .Bl -tag -width /dev/XXrXraidX -compact
@@ -240,16 +240,16 @@ device special files.
 .Xr newfs 8 ,
 .Xr raidctl 8
 .Sh HISTORY
-The 
+The
 .Nm
-driver in 
+driver in
 .Ox
 is a port of RAIDframe, a framework for rapid prototyping of RAID
 structures developed by the folks at the Parallel Data Laboratory at
 Carnegie Mellon University (CMU).  RAIDframe, as originally distributed
 by CMU, provides a RAID simulator for a number of different
 architectures, and a user-level device driver and a kernel device
-driver for Digital Unix.  The 
+driver for Digital Unix.  The
 .Nm
 driver is a kernelized version of RAIDframe v1.1.
 .Pp
@@ -258,7 +258,7 @@ RAIDframe is found in the paper "RAIDframe: A Rapid Prototyping Tool
 for RAID Systems", by William V. Courtright II, Garth Gibson, Mark
 Holland, LeAnn Neal Reilly, and Jim Zelenka, and published by the
 Parallel Data Laboratory of Carnegie Mellon University.
-The 
+The
 .Nm
 driver first appeared in
 .Nx 1.4
diff --git a/share/man/man4/rln.4 b/share/man/man4/rln.4
index 3c835a0f2db..76c1263ee9f 100644
--- a/share/man/man4/rln.4
+++ b/share/man/man4/rln.4
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-.\"	$OpenBSD: rln.4,v 1.2 1999/07/07 10:50:10 aaron Exp $
+.\"	$OpenBSD: rln.4,v 1.3 1999/07/09 13:35:49 aaron Exp $
 .Dd 2 April, 1999
 .Dt RLN 4
 .Os
@@ -28,17 +28,17 @@ device driver supports at least the following cards:
 Digital RoamAbout FH 2400 PC-Card
 .El
 .Pp
-The Proxim RangeLAN2 air protocol is incompatible with the older 
+The Proxim RangeLAN2 air protocol is incompatible with the older
 RangeLAN(1) cards, Lucent Technologies' WaveLan cards, and with
 the newer 802.11 cards in general.
 .Pp
-The RangeLAN2 cards communicate using radio signals near the 2.4GHz 
+The RangeLAN2 cards communicate using radio signals near the 2.4GHz
 part of the spectrum.
-This frequency happens to co-incide with that of strong harmonics emitted 
+This frequency happens to co-incide with that of strong harmonics emitted
 by common consumer microwave ovens. You can guess the rest.
 .\" .Sh CONFIGURATION
-.\" Because there is no reliable way to determine between 
-.\" the different types of cards listed above, 
+.\" Because there is no reliable way to determine between
+.\" the different types of cards listed above,
 .\" the following flags can be specified in the kernel config file:
 .\" .Pp
 .\" .Bl -tag -offset indent -width 10n -compact
@@ -70,7 +70,7 @@ another.
 .It "rln0: lost sync"
 Synchronisation was lost. Check for microwave ovens being used.
 .It "rln0: nothing to sync to; now master"
-The card was unsuccessful in (re-)synchronising with any other unit, 
+The card was unsuccessful in (re-)synchronising with any other unit,
 and was configured as an alternate master.
 .It "rln0: packet too big (? > ?)"
 The card generate a message bigger than the maximum size allowable for Ethernet.
@@ -86,7 +86,7 @@ run. Check the cpu load.
 .It "rln0: lost message ?? seq ?"
 An expected response to the command did not appear within a reasonable time.
 .It "rln0: unknown RangeLAN2 wireless network card"
-The card model was not matched in the known-card tables. 
+The card model was not matched in the known-card tables.
 Please send output of
 .Xr dmesg 8
 and a description of your card in using
@@ -102,11 +102,11 @@ so that this can be rectified.
 .Xr ifconfig 8 ,
 .Pa "http://www.proxim.com/"
 .Sh AUTHOR
-David Leonard, 
+David Leonard,
 Dept Computer Science and Electrical Engineering, University of Queensland
 .Pa "<david.leonard@csee.uq.edu.au>"
 .Pp
-Information and ideas gleaned from disassembly of Dave Koberstein's 
+Information and ideas gleaned from disassembly of Dave Koberstein's
 .Pa "<davek@komacke.com>"
 Linux driver (which apparently uses Proxim code),
 from Yoichi Shinoda's
@@ -117,14 +117,14 @@ Geoff Voelker's
 Linux port of the same.
 .Sh BUGS
 This driver has not been tested with lots of cards, so there are bound
-to be subtle timing problems with different hardware. 
+to be subtle timing problems with different hardware.
 It should also work with the Symphony PC cards.
 .Pp
 I couldn't figure out how to make roaming work, nor how to interpret
 the RSSI link quality values.
 .Pp
 There is no way to change the channel or security ID on the card, or
-to make it a master, except through source code. 
+to make it a master, except through source code.
 This is because it is currently impossible under
 OpenBSD to trigger such changes through calls to
 .Xr ioctl 2
diff --git a/share/man/man4/route.4 b/share/man/man4/route.4
index 382dc323615..6a3d37c95c7 100644
--- a/share/man/man4/route.4
+++ b/share/man/man4/route.4
@@ -37,7 +37,7 @@
 .Dt ROUTE 4
 .Os
 .Sh NAME
-.Nm route 
+.Nm route
 .Nd kernel packet forwarding database
 .Sh SYNOPSIS
 .Fd #include <sys/socket.h>
@@ -85,7 +85,7 @@ is requested to address the packet to the gateway listed in the routing entry
 (i.e. the packet is forwarded).
 .Pp
 When routing a packet,
-the kernel will attempt to find 
+the kernel will attempt to find
 the most specific route matching the destination.
 (If there are two different mask and value-under-the-mask pairs
 that match, the more specific is the one with more bits in the mask.
@@ -167,14 +167,14 @@ at the
 .Dv SOL_SOCKET
 level is to be turned off.
 A process may ignore all messages from the routing socket
-by doing a 
+by doing a
 .Xr shutdown 2
 system call for further input.
 .Pp
 If a route is in use when it is deleted,
 the routing entry will be marked down and removed from the routing table,
 but the resources associated with it will not
-be reclaimed until all references to it are released. 
+be reclaimed until all references to it are released.
 User processes can obtain information about the routing
 entry to a specific destination by using a
 .Dv RTM_GET
diff --git a/share/man/man4/scsi.4 b/share/man/man4/scsi.4
index fd8c220f893..5d488b90672 100644
--- a/share/man/man4/scsi.4
+++ b/share/man/man4/scsi.4
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-.\"	$OpenBSD: scsi.4,v 1.6 1999/06/05 13:18:32 aaron Exp $
+.\"	$OpenBSD: scsi.4,v 1.7 1999/07/09 13:35:47 aaron Exp $
 .\"
 .Dd August 4, 1996
 .Dt SCSI 4
@@ -21,7 +21,7 @@ The
 .Em scsi
 system provides a uniform and modular system for the implementation
 of drivers to control various scsi devices, and to utilize different
-scsi host adapters through host adapter drivers. When the system probes the 
+scsi host adapters through host adapter drivers. When the system probes the
 .Em SCSI
 busses, it attaches any devices it finds to the appropriate
 drivers. If no driver seems appropriate, then it attaches the device to the
@@ -66,7 +66,7 @@ type.  That is, if you have a disk wired down as
 then the first non-wired disk shall come on line as
 .Em sd2 .
 .Sh IOCTLS
-There are a number of ioctls that work on any 
+There are a number of ioctls that work on any
 .Em SCSI
 device. They are defined in
 .Em sys/scsiio.h
@@ -81,13 +81,13 @@ reset a device.
 Turn on debugging.. All scsi operations originating from this device's driver
 will be traced to the console, along with other information. Debugging is
 controlled by four bits, described in the header file. If no debugging is
-configured into the kernel, debugging will have no effect. 
+configured into the kernel, debugging will have no effect.
 .Em SCSI
 debugging is controlled by the configuration option
 .Em SCSIDEBUG.
 .It Dv SCIOCCOMMAND
 Take a scsi command and data from a user process and apply them to the scsi
-device. Return all status information and return data to the process. The 
+device. Return all status information and return data to the process. The
 ioctl will return a successful status even if the device rejected the
 command. As all status is returned to the user, it is up to the user
 process to examine this information to decide the success of the command.
@@ -112,23 +112,23 @@ already controlled by an explicit driver.
 .Sh ADAPTERS
 The system allows common device drivers to work through many different
 types of adapters. The adapters take requests from the upper layers and do
-all IO between the 
+all IO between the
 .Em SCSI
 bus and the system. The maximum size of a transfer is governed by the
 adapter. Most adapters can transfer 64KB in a single operation, and
 many can transfer larger amounts.
 .Sh TARGET MODE
-Some adapters support 
+Some adapters support
 .Em target mode
 in which the system is capable of operating as a device, responding to
 operations initiated by another system. Target mode will be supported for
 some adapters, but is not yet complete for this version of the scsi system.
 .Sh DIAGNOSTICS
-When the kernel is compiled with option SCSIDEBUG, the SCIOCDEBUG ioctl 
-can be used to enable various amounts of tracing information on any 
+When the kernel is compiled with option SCSIDEBUG, the SCIOCDEBUG ioctl
+can be used to enable various amounts of tracing information on any
 specific device. Devices not being traced will not produce trace information.
 The four bits that make up the debug level each control certain types
-of debugging information. 
+of debugging information.
 .Bl -tag -width "Bit 0"
 .It Dv Bit 0
 shows all scsi bus operations including scsi commands,
diff --git a/share/man/man4/sd.4 b/share/man/man4/sd.4
index dc13b080037..bc2186ce7fc 100644
--- a/share/man/man4/sd.4
+++ b/share/man/man4/sd.4
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-.\"	$OpenBSD: sd.4,v 1.1 1997/03/28 22:53:41 millert Exp $
+.\"	$OpenBSD: sd.4,v 1.2 1999/07/09 13:35:47 aaron Exp $
 .\"	$NetBSD: sd.4,v 1.3 1996/10/20 23:15:23 explorer Exp $
 .\"
 .\" Copyright (c) 1996
@@ -38,20 +38,20 @@
 .Sh DESCRIPTION
 The
 .Nm sd
-driver provides support for a 
+driver provides support for a
 .Tn SCSI
 disk. It allows the disk
 to be divided up into a set of pseudo devices called
 .Em partitions .
-In general the interfaces are similar to those described by 
+In general the interfaces are similar to those described by
 .Xr wd 4 .
 .Pp
-Where the 
+Where the
 .Xr wd 4
-device has a fairly low level interface to the system, 
+device has a fairly low level interface to the system,
 .Tn SCSI
 devices have a much higher level interface and talk to the system via
-a 
+a
 .Tn SCSI
 host adapter
 (e.g.,
@@ -65,14 +65,14 @@ disk can be configured.
 .Pp
 When the
 .Tn SCSI
-adapter is probed during boot, the 
+adapter is probed during boot, the
 .Tn SCSI
-bus is scanned for devices. Any devices found which answer as 
+bus is scanned for devices. Any devices found which answer as
 .Sq Em Direct
-type devices will be attached to the 
+type devices will be attached to the
 .Nm
 driver.
-.\"In 
+.\"In
 .\".Tn FreeBSD
 .\"releases prior to 2.1, the first found was attached as
 .\".Li sd0 ,
@@ -88,7 +88,7 @@ driver.
 .\".Xr scsi 4
 .\"for details on kernel configuration.
 .Sh PARTITIONING
-.\"The 
+.\"The
 .\".Nm
 .\"driver allows the disk to have two levels of partitioning.
 .\"One layer, called the
@@ -108,7 +108,7 @@ driver.
 .\"and
 .\".Xr disklabel 8 ,
 .\"respectively.)
-On many systems 
+On many systems
 .Xr disklabel 8
 is used to partition the drive into filesystems.  On some systems the
 NetBSD portion of the disk resides within a native partition, and another
@@ -137,16 +137,16 @@ the disk with other operating systems.
 .\".Tn SCSI
 .\"bus.
 .Sh IOCTLS
-The following 
+The following
 .Xr ioctl 2
-calls apply to 
+calls apply to
 .Tn SCSI
 disks as well as to other disks.  They are defined in the header file
 .Aq Pa disklabel.h .
 .Pp
 .Bl -tag -width DIOCSDINFO
 .\".It Dv DIOCSBAD
-.\"Usually used to set up a bad-block mapping system on the disk. 
+.\"Usually used to set up a bad-block mapping system on the disk.
 .\".Tn SCSI
 .\"drive incorporate their own bad-block mapping so this command is not
 .\"implemented.
@@ -177,17 +177,17 @@ use.
 Eject the media cartridge from a removable device.
 .El
 .Pp
-In addition, the 
+In addition, the
 .Xr scsi 4
 general
 .Fn ioctl
-commands may be used with the 
+commands may be used with the
 .Nm
-driver, but only against the 
+driver, but only against the
 .Sq Li c
 (whole disk) partition.
 .Sh NOTES
-If a removable device is attached to the 
+If a removable device is attached to the
 .Nm
 driver, then the act of changing the media will invalidate the
 disklabel and information held within the kernel.  To avoid
diff --git a/share/man/man4/sm.4 b/share/man/man4/sm.4
index 53e7d5b76fc..a24a4192646 100644
--- a/share/man/man4/sm.4
+++ b/share/man/man4/sm.4
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-.\"	$OpenBSD: sm.4,v 1.4 1999/06/05 13:18:34 aaron Exp $	
+.\"	$OpenBSD: sm.4,v 1.5 1999/07/09 13:35:47 aaron Exp $
 .\"	$NetBSD: sm.4,v 1.3 1998/08/09 00:39:02 thorpej Exp $
 .\"
 .\" Copyright (c) 1997 The NetBSD Foundation, Inc.
diff --git a/share/man/man4/spp.4 b/share/man/man4/spp.4
index cdcae17f3f0..4245b9b583a 100644
--- a/share/man/man4/spp.4
+++ b/share/man/man4/spp.4
@@ -76,7 +76,7 @@ system call must be used
 after binding the socket with the
 .Xr bind 2
 system call.  Only
-passive sockets may use the 
+passive sockets may use the
 .Xr accept 2
 call to accept incoming connections.  Only active sockets may
 use the
@@ -157,7 +157,7 @@ when an attempt
 is made to create a socket with a port which has already been
 allocated;
 .It Bq Er EADDRNOTAVAIL
-when an attempt is made to create a 
+when an attempt is made to create a
 socket with a network address for which no network interface
 exists.
 .El
diff --git a/share/man/man4/sppp.4 b/share/man/man4/sppp.4
index 22b7348544a..d4ae06b4d3f 100644
--- a/share/man/man4/sppp.4
+++ b/share/man/man4/sppp.4
@@ -23,7 +23,7 @@
 .\" (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF
 .\" THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
 .\"
-.\" $Id: sppp.4,v 1.1 1999/07/02 18:09:47 deraadt Exp $
+.\" $Id: sppp.4,v 1.2 1999/07/09 13:35:49 aaron Exp $
 .\"
 .Dd May 19, 1997
 .Dt SPPP 4
@@ -69,7 +69,7 @@ mode.  This means, the administrative
 event to the LCP layer will be delayed until after the lower layers
 signals an
 .Em Up
-event (rise of 
+event (rise of
 .Dq carrier ) .
 This can be used by lower layers to support
 a dialin connection where the physical layer isn't available
diff --git a/share/man/man4/ss.4 b/share/man/man4/ss.4
index e6dd0e8fe77..ec00a284d83 100644
--- a/share/man/man4/ss.4
+++ b/share/man/man4/ss.4
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-.\" $OpenBSD: ss.4,v 1.4 1999/07/08 09:41:43 hugh Exp $
+.\" $OpenBSD: ss.4,v 1.5 1999/07/09 13:35:47 aaron Exp $
 .\"
 .\" Copyright (c) 1998 Kenneth Stailey and Ian Darwin
 .\"
@@ -57,8 +57,8 @@ during operation.  You can use a second controller.)
 Obviously a SCSI host adapter must be present in the config file
 before this device can be configured.
 .Pp
-If a count is given, that many 
-.Nm ss 
+If a count is given, that many
+.Nm ss
 devices will be configured into the kernel.
 .Sh IOCTLS
 This device provides the
@@ -71,7 +71,7 @@ The third argument is the address of a scan_io structure;
 details of this structure can be found in the header file
 .Nm scanio.h.
 .Pp
-The 
+The
 .Nm SCIOCRESTART
 ioctl ignores the third parameter, and restarts the scan.
 The
diff --git a/share/man/man4/st.4 b/share/man/man4/st.4
index 340da33eaa5..bf175865444 100644
--- a/share/man/man4/st.4
+++ b/share/man/man4/st.4
@@ -67,17 +67,17 @@ tape can be configured.
 .Pp
 As the
 .Tn SCSI
-adapter is probed during boot, the 
+adapter is probed during boot, the
 .Tn SCSI
 bus is scanned for devices. Any devices found which answer as
 .Sq Em Sequential
-type devices will be attached to the 
+type devices will be attached to the
 .Nm
 driver.
 .Sh MOUNT SESSIONS
-The 
+The
 .Nm
-driver is based around the concept of a 
+driver is based around the concept of a
 .Dq Em mount session ,
 which is defined as the period between the time that a tape is
 mounted, and the time when it is unmounted.  Any parameters set
@@ -103,7 +103,7 @@ will be loaded freshly from the new mode.  (See below for more on
 modes.)
 .El
 .Sh MODES AND SUB-MODES
-There are several different 
+There are several different
 .Sq operation
 modes. These are controlled by bits 2 and 3 of the minor number
 and are designed to allow users to easily read and write different
@@ -143,11 +143,11 @@ Reserved.  Currently unused.
 .El
 .Sh BLOCKING MODES
 .Tn SCSI
-tapes may run in either 
+tapes may run in either
 .Sq Em variable
 or
 .Sq Em fixed
-block-size modes.  Most 
+block-size modes.  Most
 .Tn QIC Ns -type
 devices run in fixed block-size mode, where most nine-track tapes
 and many new cartridge formats allow variable block-size.  The
@@ -155,7 +155,7 @@ difference between the two is as follows:
 .Bl -inset
 .It Variable block-size:
 Each write made to the device results in a single logical record
-written to the tape.  One can never read or write 
+written to the tape.  One can never read or write
 .Em part
 of a record from tape (though you may request a larger block and
 read a smaller record); nor can one read multiple blocks.  Data
@@ -216,7 +216,7 @@ of densities and blocksizes for each of the modes, along with a
 set of `QUIRK' flags that can be used to enable or disable sections
 of code within the driver if a particular drive is recognized.
 .Sh IOCTLS
-The following 
+The following
 .Xr ioctl 2
 calls apply to
 .Tn SCSI
@@ -262,7 +262,7 @@ over
 file marks. Leave the head on the BOM (beginning of media)
 side of the last skipped file mark.
 .It Dv MTFSR
-Skip forwards over 
+Skip forwards over
 .Va mt_count
 records.
 .It Dv MTBSR
@@ -286,7 +286,7 @@ variable blocksize operation, and the blocksize is set to 0, then the drive
 will be driven in variable mode. This parameter is in effect for the present
 mount session only.
 .It Dv MTSETDNSTY
-Set the density value (see 
+Set the density value (see
 .Xr mt 1 )
 to use when running in the mode opened (minor bits 2 and 3).
 This parameter is in effect for the present
@@ -323,7 +323,7 @@ This
 .Nm
 driver was originally written for
 .Tn Mach
-2.5 by Julian Elischer, and was ported to 
+2.5 by Julian Elischer, and was ported to
 .Tn NetBSD
 by Charles Hannum.  This man page was edited for
 .Tn NetBSD
diff --git a/share/man/man4/strip.4 b/share/man/man4/strip.4
index 4b647650957..7154013e40f 100644
--- a/share/man/man4/strip.4
+++ b/share/man/man4/strip.4
@@ -89,7 +89,7 @@ be sent independently to different MAC addresses.  However,
 the "Star-mode" framing and MAC addressing are not in any way
 compatible with Ethernet.  Broadcast or multicast to more than one radio is not
 possible, due to the independent frequency-hopping operation of the radios.
-The interface flags 
+The interface flags
 .Dv IFF_POINTOPOINT
 and
 .Dv IFF_BROADCAST
@@ -100,7 +100,7 @@ interface.
 In other words,
 .Nm
 implements a multiple-access, non-broadcast device, accessed via
-an RS-232 serial line, using a proprietary packet framing scheme. 
+an RS-232 serial line, using a proprietary packet framing scheme.
 .Pp
 This version
 .Nm
@@ -110,13 +110,13 @@ map IP addresses of peer radios to the MAC-level addresses.
 The exact syntax of this mapping and an example are discussed below.
 The Internet Assigned Numbers Authority (IANA) has allocated an ARP
 type code for use with STRIP. A future version of this driver will
-support 
+support
 .Xr arp 4
 to obtain the IP address of reachable peer radios dynamically.
 .Sh ADDRESS CONFIGURATION
 This version of the STRIP driver requires static pre-configuration of
 the mapping from IP addresses to radio MAC addresses.
-The 
+The
 .Xr route 8
 command should be used to bind a peer STRIP host's radio IP address
 to the peer's  link-level radio address.   Radio addresses are encoded
@@ -169,7 +169,7 @@ has not been widely tested on a variety of lower-level tty drivers.
 .P
 The detection and resetting of radios that crash out of Starmode does
 not always work in this version of the driver.  One workaround
-is to kill the 
+is to kill the
 .Xr slattach
 process, ifconfig the
 .Nm
@@ -178,7 +178,7 @@ interface down, and then start a new slattach and rerun ifconfig.
 .Nm
 was originally developed  for the Linux kernel by Stuart
 Cheshire of  Stanford's Operating Systems and Networking group,
-as part of Mary Baker's  MosquitoNet 
+as part of Mary Baker's  MosquitoNet
 .Sy http://mosquitonet.stanford.edu/mosquitonet.html
 project.
 This
diff --git a/share/man/man4/sv.4 b/share/man/man4/sv.4
index 518ffec255f..dbb10f84ddc 100644
--- a/share/man/man4/sv.4
+++ b/share/man/man4/sv.4
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-.\" $OpenBSD: sv.4,v 1.3 1998/09/06 22:23:19 aaron Exp $
+.\" $OpenBSD: sv.4,v 1.4 1999/07/09 13:35:47 aaron Exp $
 .\" Copyright (c) 1998 Constantine Paul Sapuntzakis
 .\" All rights reserved
 .\"
@@ -13,7 +13,7 @@
 .\"    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
 .\"    documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
 .\" 3. The author's name or those of the contributors may not be used to
-.\"    endorse or promote products derived from this software without 
+.\"    endorse or promote products derived from this software without
 .\"    specific prior written permission.
 .\"
 .\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR(S) AND CONTRIBUTORS
@@ -43,7 +43,7 @@ The
 driver provides support for S3 SonicVibes (S3-617) chipset-based
 cards. Disabling the SRS 3-D spatial feature of the chip is
 recommended for higher quality audio. This can be done in software
-by issuing the 
+by issuing the
 .Bd -literal -offset indent
 mixerctl -w outputs.spatial=off
 .Ed
diff --git a/share/man/man4/tcp.4 b/share/man/man4/tcp.4
index 61dd78aff02..d97a26d435e 100644
--- a/share/man/man4/tcp.4
+++ b/share/man/man4/tcp.4
@@ -75,7 +75,7 @@ system call must be used
 after binding the socket with the
 .Xr bind 2
 system call.  Only
-passive sockets may use the 
+passive sockets may use the
 .Xr accept 2
 call to accept incoming connections.  Only active sockets may
 use the
@@ -173,7 +173,7 @@ when an attempt
 is made to create a socket with a port which has already been
 allocated;
 .It Bq Er EADDRNOTAVAIL
-when an attempt is made to create a 
+when an attempt is made to create a
 socket with a network address for which no network interface
 exists.
 .El
diff --git a/share/man/man4/termios.4 b/share/man/man4/termios.4
index 7197411168a..6910f8e757a 100644
--- a/share/man/man4/termios.4
+++ b/share/man/man4/termios.4
@@ -1105,7 +1105,7 @@ is set, two stop bits are used, otherwise one stop bit.  For example, at
 If
 .Dv CREAD
 is set, the receiver is enabled.  Otherwise, no character is
-received. 
+received.
 Not all hardware supports this bit.  In fact, this flag
 is pretty silly and if it were not part of the
 .Nm termios
diff --git a/share/man/man4/tp.4 b/share/man/man4/tp.4
index 4564a262131..d2cff0e7930 100644
--- a/share/man/man4/tp.4
+++ b/share/man/man4/tp.4
@@ -52,7 +52,7 @@ Transport Protocol
 The
 .Tn TP
 protocol provides reliable, flow-controlled, two-way
-transmission of data and record boundaries. 
+transmission of data and record boundaries.
 It is a byte-stream protocol and is accessed according to
 the
 .Dv SOCK_SEQPACKET
@@ -81,7 +81,7 @@ system call must be used
 after binding the socket with the
 .Xr bind 2
 system call.  Only
-passive sockets may use the 
+passive sockets may use the
 .Xr accept 2
 call to accept incoming connections.  Only active sockets may
 use the
@@ -113,7 +113,7 @@ Transport Protocol implemented for
 .Tn AOS R2
 at the University of Wisconsin - Madison,
 and modified for inclusion in the Berkeley Software Distribution,
-includes classes 0 and 4 
+includes classes 0 and 4
 of the
 .Tn ISO
 transport protocols
@@ -129,7 +129,7 @@ Class 0 is essentially a null transport protocol, which is used
 when the underlying network service provides reliable, sequenced,
 flow-controlled, two-way data transmission.
 Class 0 does not provide the expedited data service.
-The protocols are implemented as a single transport layer entity 
+The protocols are implemented as a single transport layer entity
 that coexists with the Internet protocol suite.
 Class 0 may be used only in the
 .Tn ISO
@@ -158,13 +158,13 @@ and
 .Xr write 2
 system calls may be used.
 .Pp
-Through the 
+Through the
 .Xr getsockopt
 and
 .Xr setsockopt
 system calls,
 .Tn TP
-supports several options 
+supports several options
 to control such things as negotiable options
 in the protocol and protocol strategies.
 The options are defined in
@@ -174,7 +174,7 @@ and are described below.
 In the tables below,
 the options marked with a pound sign
 .Ql \&#
-may be used 
+may be used
 with
 .Xr setsockopt
 after a connection is established.
@@ -182,9 +182,9 @@ Others must be used before the connection
 is established, in other words,
 before calling
 .Xr connect
-or 
+or
 .Xr accept .
-All options may be used 
+All options may be used
 with
 .Xr getsockopt
 before or
@@ -247,7 +247,7 @@ the connection.
 (char *) [none]
 .br
 Data to send when confirming a connection.
-This may also be sent by a 
+This may also be sent by a
 .Xr setsockopt
 system call, or by issuing a
 .Xr sendmsg
@@ -260,13 +260,13 @@ Boolean.
 When
 .Xr true ,
 performance measurements will be kept
-for this connection.  
+for this connection.
 When set before a connection is established, the
 active side will use a locally defined parameter on the
 connect request packet; if the peer is another
 .Tn ARGO
 implementation, this will cause performance measurement to be
-turned 
+turned
 on the passive side as well.
 See
 .Xr tpperf 8 .
@@ -299,8 +299,8 @@ is the argument used with the
 .Xr getsockopt
 or
 .Xr setsockopt
-system call. 
-It is described in 
+system call.
+It is described in
 .Aq Pa netiso/tp_user.h .
 .Pp
 The fields of the
@@ -359,7 +359,7 @@ nonzero short integer [various]
 Number of clock ticks for which a reference will
 be considered frozen after the connection to which
 it applied is closed.
-This parameter applies to classes 4 and 0 in the 
+This parameter applies to classes 4 and 0 in the
 .Tn ARGO
 implementation, despite the fact that
 the frozen reference function is required only for
@@ -367,7 +367,7 @@ class 4.
 .It Ar p_inact_ticks
 nonzero short integer [various]
 .br
-Number of clock ticks without an incoming packet from the peer after which 
+Number of clock ticks without an incoming packet from the peer after which
 .Tn TP
 close the connection.
 This parameter applies only to class 4.
@@ -388,11 +388,11 @@ The actual window size at any time
 during the lifetime of a connection
 is a function of the buffer size limit, the negotiated
 maximum TPDU
-size, and the 
+size, and the
 rate at which the user program receives data.
 This parameter applies only to class 4.
 .It Ar p_tpdusize
-unsigned char between 0x7 and 0xd. 
+unsigned char between 0x7 and 0xd.
 [0xc for class 4] [0xb for class 0]
 .br
 Log 2 of the maximum TPDU size to be negotiated.
@@ -400,7 +400,7 @@ The
 .Tn TP
 standard
 .Pf ( Tn ISO
-8473) gives an upper bound of 
+8473) gives an upper bound of
 0xd for class 4 and 0xb for class 0.
 The
 .Tn ARGO
@@ -448,11 +448,11 @@ a retransmission occurs.
 .Dv TPRX_FASTSTART :
 Begin sending the maximum amount of data permitted
 by the peer (subject to availability).
-The alternative is to start sending slowly by 
+The alternative is to start sending slowly by
 pretending the peer's window is smaller than it is, and letting
 it slowly grow up to the peer window's real size.
 This is to smooth the effect of new connections on a congested network
-by preventing a transport connection from suddenly 
+by preventing a transport connection from suddenly
 overloading the network with a burst of packets.
 This strategy is also due to Van Jacobson.
 .It Ar p_class
@@ -476,7 +476,7 @@ This parameter applies only to class 4.
 Boolean.
 [true]
 .br
-Boolean indicating that 
+Boolean indicating that
 the expedited data transport service will be negotiated.
 This parameter applies only to class 4.
 .It Ar p_use_checksum
@@ -526,7 +526,7 @@ Indicates which network service is to be used.
 .Pp
 .Dv ISO_CLNS
 indicates the connectionless network service provided
-by CLNP 
+by CLNP
 .Pf ( Tn ISO
 8473).
 .Pp
@@ -539,16 +539,16 @@ by X.25
 8878.
 .Pp
 .Dv ISO_COSNS
-indicates the 
+indicates the
 connectionless network service running over a
-connection-oriented subnetwork service: CLNP 
+connection-oriented subnetwork service: CLNP
 .Pf ( Tn ISO
 8473) over X.25
 .Pf ( Tn ISO
 8208).
 .Pp
 .Dv IN_CLNS
-indicates the 
+indicates the
 DARPA Internet connectionless network service provided by IP (RFC 791).
 .It Ar p_dummy
 Reserved for future use.
@@ -568,7 +568,7 @@ The bit numbering used is that of the RT PC, which means that bit
 .Sy Description [Default]
 .It \&0
 .Dv TPFLAG_NLQOS_PDN :
-set when the quality of the 
+set when the quality of the
 network service is
 similar to that of a public data network.
 .It \&1
@@ -618,7 +618,7 @@ entity issues a
 .Dv SIGURG
 signal, indicating that
 disconnection has occurred.
-If the signal is issued during a 
+If the signal is issued during a
 a system call, the system call may be interrupted,
 in which case the
 .Va errno
@@ -648,7 +648,7 @@ A user program should take one of the following approaches:
 If the program is servicing
 only one connection, it can block or ignore
 .Dv SIGURG
-during connection 
+during connection
 establishment.
 The advantage of this is that the
 .Va errno
@@ -665,10 +665,10 @@ service
 .Dv SIGURG .
 It can use the
 .Fn getsockopt ...TPOPT_FLAGS...
-system 
+system
 call to see if the signal
 was due to the arrival of expedited data or due to a disconnection.
-In the latter case, 
+In the latter case,
 .Xr getsockopt
 will return
 .Er ENOTCONN .
diff --git a/share/man/man4/udp.4 b/share/man/man4/udp.4
index 96ee4a9853f..432f4fbea1e 100644
--- a/share/man/man4/udp.4
+++ b/share/man/man4/udp.4
@@ -60,11 +60,11 @@ and
 calls, though the
 .Xr connect 2
 call may also be used to fix the destination for future
-packets (in which case the 
+packets (in which case the
 .Xr recv 2
 or
 .Xr read 2
-and 
+and
 .Xr send 2
 or
 .Xr write 2
@@ -120,7 +120,7 @@ when an attempt
 is made to create a socket with a port which has already been
 allocated;
 .It Bq Er EADDRNOTAVAIL
-when an attempt is made to create a 
+when an attempt is made to create a
 socket with a network address for which no network interface
 exists.
 .El
diff --git a/share/man/man4/uk.4 b/share/man/man4/uk.4
index ac02195d143..bb8121c3f1c 100644
--- a/share/man/man4/uk.4
+++ b/share/man/man4/uk.4
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-.\"	$OpenBSD: uk.4,v 1.5 1999/07/03 02:11:12 aaron Exp $
+.\"	$OpenBSD: uk.4,v 1.6 1999/07/09 13:35:48 aaron Exp $
 .\"	$NetBSD: uk.4,v 1.3 1996/10/20 23:15:26 explorer Exp $
 .\"
 .\" Copyright (c) 1996
@@ -37,21 +37,21 @@
 .Sh DESCRIPTION
 The
 .Nm uk
-driver provides support for a 
+driver provides support for a
 process to address devices on the scsi bus for which there is no configured
-driver. 
+driver.
 .Pp
 A scsi adapter must also be separately configured into the system
 before this driver makes sense.
 .Sh KERNEL CONFIGURATION
 If a count is given that number of
-.Nm 
+.Nm
 devices will be configured into the kernel.
 .Sh IOCTLS
-The 
+The
 .Nm
 driver has no ioctls of its own but rather acts as a medium for the
-generic 
+generic
 .Xr scsi 4
 ioctls. These are described in
 .Em sys/scsiio.h.
@@ -63,7 +63,7 @@ uk{x} is the  'xth'unknown device found.
 .Sh DIAGNOSTICS
 All
 .Xr scsi 4
-debug ioctls work on 
+debug ioctls work on
 .Nm
 devices.
 .Sh SEE ALSO
diff --git a/share/man/man4/unix.4 b/share/man/man4/unix.4
index df39a8c5d22..b37eb93826c 100644
--- a/share/man/man4/unix.4
+++ b/share/man/man4/unix.4
@@ -50,7 +50,7 @@ that provides local (on-machine) interprocess
 communication through the normal
 .Xr socket 2
 mechanisms.
-The 
+The
 .Tn UNIX Ns -domain
 family supports the
 .Dv SOCK_STREAM
@@ -89,7 +89,7 @@ The
 protocol family does not support broadcast addressing or any form
 of
 .Dq wildcard
-matching on incoming messages. 
+matching on incoming messages.
 All addresses are absolute- or relative-pathnames
 of other
 .Tn UNIX Ns -domain
@@ -102,7 +102,7 @@ or
 .Xr sendto 2
 must be writable.
 .Sh PROTOCOLS
-The 
+The
 .Tn UNIX Ns -domain
 protocol family is comprised of simple
 transport protocols that support the
@@ -111,7 +111,7 @@ and
 .Dv SOCK_DGRAM
 abstractions.
 .Dv SOCK_STREAM
-sockets also support the communication of 
+sockets also support the communication of
 .Ux
 file descriptors through the use of the
 .Ar msg_control
@@ -123,7 +123,7 @@ and
 .Xr recvmsg 2 .
 .Pp
 Any valid descriptor may be sent in a message.
-The file descriptor(s) to be passed are described using a 
+The file descriptor(s) to be passed are described using a
 .Ar struct cmsghdr
 that is defined in the include file
 .Aq Pa sys/socket.h .
@@ -136,13 +136,13 @@ by the length field of the message;
 the length field is the sum of the size of the header
 plus the size of the array of file descriptors.
 .Pp
-The received descriptor is a 
+The received descriptor is a
 .Em duplicate
 of the sender's descriptor, as if it were created with a call to
 .Xr dup 2 .
 Per-process descriptor flags, set with
 .Xr fcntl 2 ,
-are 
+are
 .Em not
 passed to a receiver.
 Descriptors that are awaiting delivery, or that are
diff --git a/share/man/man4/vnd.4 b/share/man/man4/vnd.4
index bc436724d54..7355d6a05aa 100644
--- a/share/man/man4/vnd.4
+++ b/share/man/man4/vnd.4
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-.\"	$OpenBSD: vnd.4,v 1.10 1999/07/03 02:11:12 aaron Exp $
+.\"	$OpenBSD: vnd.4,v 1.11 1999/07/09 13:35:48 aaron Exp $
 .\"	$NetBSD: vnd.4,v 1.1 1995/12/30 18:10:48 thorpej Exp $
 .\"
 .\" Copyright (c) 1995 Jason R. Thorpe.
@@ -54,7 +54,7 @@ not for building disk-images, and the
 .Nm
 ) variant that goes
 through the buffercache, thereby maintaining cache-coherency after the
-block-device is closed which makes it suitable for creating disk images.  
+block-device is closed which makes it suitable for creating disk images.
 The latter is not good for swapping on, though.
 .Pp
 This document assumes that you're familiar with how to generate kernels,
diff --git a/share/man/man4/wd.4 b/share/man/man4/wd.4
index 770a03c5eb0..7b7794ea424 100644
--- a/share/man/man4/wd.4
+++ b/share/man/man4/wd.4
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-.\"	$OpenBSD: wd.4,v 1.2 1999/06/05 13:18:33 aaron Exp $
+.\"	$OpenBSD: wd.4,v 1.3 1999/07/09 13:35:48 aaron Exp $
 .\"
 .\" Copyright (c) 1998, Jason Downs.  All rights reserved.
 .\"
@@ -33,7 +33,7 @@
 .Cd "wd* at wdc?"
 .Sh DESCRIPTION
 The
-.Nm wd 
+.Nm wd
 driver provides support for random access disk drives, using standard
 ST506/ESDI/IDE controllers.
 .Sh FILES
diff --git a/share/man/man4/xl.4 b/share/man/man4/xl.4
index cf9b5716f25..6d5980c6b02 100644
--- a/share/man/man4/xl.4
+++ b/share/man/man4/xl.4
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-.\"	$OpenBSD: xl.4,v 1.11 1999/07/08 22:40:48 aaron Exp $
+.\"	$OpenBSD: xl.4,v 1.12 1999/07/09 13:35:48 aaron Exp $
 .\"
 .\" Copyright (c) 1997, 1998
 .\"     Bill Paul <wpaul@ctr.columbia.edu>. All rights reserved.
@@ -126,7 +126,7 @@ For example,
 .Pp
 .Sh DIAGNOSTICS
 .Bl -diag
-.It "xl%d: couldn't map memory" 
+.It "xl%d: couldn't map memory"
 A fatal initialization error has occurred.
 .It "xl%d: couldn't map interrupt"
 A fatal initialization error has occurred.
@@ -185,16 +185,16 @@ the author considers it a manufacturing defect.
 .Xr ifmedia 4 ,
 .Xr ifconfig 8
 .Sh HISTORY
-The 
+The
 .Nm
 device driver first appeared in
 .Fx 3.0 ,
-and 
+and
 .Ox
 support was added in
 .Ox 2.4 .
 .Sh AUTHOR
-The 
+The
 .Nm
 driver was written by
 .An Bill Paul Aq wpaul@ctr.columbia.edu .
diff --git a/share/man/man4/ym.4 b/share/man/man4/ym.4
index 99fa155bc4e..30d9d1f949c 100644
--- a/share/man/man4/ym.4
+++ b/share/man/man4/ym.4
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-.\" $OpenBSD: ym.4,v 1.2 1998/09/06 22:23:20 aaron Exp $
+.\" $OpenBSD: ym.4,v 1.3 1999/07/09 13:35:48 aaron Exp $
 .\" Copyright (c) 1998 Constantine Paul Sapuntzakis
 .\" All rights reserved
 .\"
@@ -13,7 +13,7 @@
 .\"    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
 .\"    documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
 .\" 3. The author's name or those of the contributors may not be used to
-.\"    endorse or promote products derived from this software without 
+.\"    endorse or promote products derived from this software without
 .\"    specific prior written permission.
 .\"
 .\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR(S) AND CONTRIBUTORS
@@ -41,7 +41,7 @@
 The
 .Nm
 driver provides support for Yamaha OPL3-SAX chipset-based cards.
-cards. 
+cards.
 
 .Sh BUGS
 The "FM" DAC, wavetable synth, and MIDI port are not
@@ -53,7 +53,7 @@ Lots of work needed.
 .Xr mixer 4 ,
 .Xr wss 4
 .Sh HISTORY
-This driver is a thin wrapper around the 
+This driver is a thin wrapper around the
 .Xr wss 4
 driver.
 The
diff --git a/share/man/man5/core.5 b/share/man/man5/core.5
index 2b7dd0d19a4..9c9014f0519 100644
--- a/share/man/man5/core.5
+++ b/share/man/man5/core.5
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-.\"	$OpenBSD: core.5,v 1.5 1999/05/23 14:11:04 aaron Exp $
+.\"	$OpenBSD: core.5,v 1.6 1999/07/09 13:35:38 aaron Exp $
 .\"	$NetBSD: core.5,v 1.4 1994/11/30 19:31:11 jtc Exp $
 .\"
 .\" Copyright (c) 1980, 1991, 1993
@@ -71,9 +71,9 @@ defined by the
 .Dv UPAGES
 manifest in the
 .Aq Pa sys/param.h
-file.  The 
+file.  The
 .Fa u .
-area starts with a 
+area starts with a
 .Fa user
 structure as given in
 .Aq Pa sys/user.h .
@@ -90,9 +90,9 @@ in the
 .Fa u .
 area.
 The amount of stack image in the core file is given (in pages) by the
-variable 
+variable
 .Fa u_ssize
-in the 
+in the
 .Ar u .
 area.
 The size of a
diff --git a/share/man/man5/dir.5 b/share/man/man5/dir.5
index 6d8251e67e2..d5fdcca06bd 100644
--- a/share/man/man5/dir.5
+++ b/share/man/man5/dir.5
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-.\"	$OpenBSD: dir.5,v 1.6 1999/05/23 14:11:04 aaron Exp $
+.\"	$OpenBSD: dir.5,v 1.7 1999/07/09 13:35:38 aaron Exp $
 .\"	$NetBSD: dir.5,v 1.5 1995/03/28 17:30:20 jtc Exp $
 .\"
 .\" Copyright (c) 1983, 1991, 1993
@@ -54,7 +54,7 @@ It consists of records (directory entries) each of which contains
 information about a file and a pointer to the file itself.
 Directory entries may contain other directories
 as well as plain files; such nested directories are referred to as
-subdirectories. 
+subdirectories.
 A hierarchy of directories and files is formed in this manner
 and is called a file system (or referred to as a file system tree).
 .\" An entry in this tree,
diff --git a/share/man/man5/disktab.5 b/share/man/man5/disktab.5
index ec1ff384417..e65ee872c96 100644
--- a/share/man/man5/disktab.5
+++ b/share/man/man5/disktab.5
@@ -53,7 +53,7 @@ to initialize the disk label on the disk.
 The format is patterned
 after the
 .Xr termcap 5
-terminal database.  Entries in 
+terminal database.  Entries in
 .Nm
 consist of a number of colon
 .Pq Sq \&:
@@ -63,7 +63,7 @@ known for the disk, separated by
 .Dq \&|
 characters.  The
 last name given should be a long name fully identifying
-the disk. 
+the disk.
 .Pp
 The following list indicates the normal values
 stored for each disk entry:
diff --git a/share/man/man5/ethers.5 b/share/man/man5/ethers.5
index 09d5baac0b3..02a7021d68d 100644
--- a/share/man/man5/ethers.5
+++ b/share/man/man5/ethers.5
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-.\"	$OpenBSD: ethers.5,v 1.9 1999/05/23 14:11:05 aaron Exp $
+.\"	$OpenBSD: ethers.5,v 1.10 1999/07/09 13:35:38 aaron Exp $
 .\"	$NetBSD: ethers.5,v 1.2 1994/11/30 19:31:16 jtc Exp $
 .\"
 .\"     Written by Roland McGrath <roland@frob.com>.  Public domain.
@@ -20,7 +20,7 @@ indicates the beginning of a comment; characters up to the end of
 the line are not interpreted by routines which search the file.
 .Pp
 Ethernet addresses are expressed as six hexadecimal numbers separated by
-colons. The functions described in 
+colons. The functions described in
 .Xr ethers 3
 can read and produce this format.
 .Pp
diff --git a/share/man/man5/fbtab.5 b/share/man/man5/fbtab.5
index 56a16b12869..224f59882a5 100644
--- a/share/man/man5/fbtab.5
+++ b/share/man/man5/fbtab.5
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-.\"	$OpenBSD: fbtab.5,v 1.3 1998/11/26 04:25:58 aaron Exp $
+.\"	$OpenBSD: fbtab.5,v 1.4 1999/07/09 13:35:38 aaron Exp $
 .\"
 .Dd August 22, 1994
 .Dt FBTAB 5
@@ -24,7 +24,7 @@ whitespace.
 .It Login Device
 The device you have logged in on (e.g.,
 .Dq /dev/ttyv0 ) .
-.It File Permission 
+.It File Permission
 An octal permission number (0600), as used by
 .Xr chmod 2 .
 .It Other devices
diff --git a/share/man/man5/fs.5 b/share/man/man5/fs.5
index 115ff8cb186..27fd7130108 100644
--- a/share/man/man5/fs.5
+++ b/share/man/man5/fs.5
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-.\"	$OpenBSD: fs.5,v 1.6 1999/05/23 14:11:05 aaron Exp $
+.\"	$OpenBSD: fs.5,v 1.7 1999/07/09 13:35:38 aaron Exp $
 .\"	$NetBSD: fs.5,v 1.3 1994/11/30 19:31:17 jtc Exp $
 .\"
 .\" Copyright (c) 1983, 1991, 1993
@@ -177,7 +177,7 @@ of
 .Dq blocks .
 File system blocks of at most size
 .Dv MAXBSIZE
-can 
+can
 be optionally broken into 2, 4, or 8 pieces, each of which is
 addressable; these pieces may be
 .Dv DEV_BSIZE ,
@@ -284,7 +284,7 @@ Note that super-blocks are never more than size
 The path name on which the file system is mounted is maintained in
 .Fa fs_fsmnt .
 .Dv MAXMNTLEN
-defines the amount of space allocated in 
+defines the amount of space allocated in
 the super-block for this name.
 The limit on the amount of summary information per file system
 is defined by
@@ -293,7 +293,7 @@ For a 4096 byte block size, it is currently parameterized for a
 maximum of two million cylinders.
 .Pp
 Per cylinder group information is summarized in blocks allocated
-from the first cylinder group's data blocks. 
+from the first cylinder group's data blocks.
 These blocks are read in from
 .Fa fs_csaddr
 (size
diff --git a/share/man/man5/fstab.5 b/share/man/man5/fstab.5
index aac829bed5c..dbd1a270664 100644
--- a/share/man/man5/fstab.5
+++ b/share/man/man5/fstab.5
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-.\"	$OpenBSD: fstab.5,v 1.8 1999/05/23 14:11:05 aaron Exp $
+.\"	$OpenBSD: fstab.5,v 1.9 1999/07/09 13:35:38 aaron Exp $
 .\"	$NetBSD: fstab.5,v 1.5.2.1 1995/11/16 20:11:11 pk Exp $
 .\"
 .\" Copyright (c) 1980, 1989, 1991, 1993
@@ -49,7 +49,7 @@ contains descriptive information about the various file
 systems.
 .Nm fstab
 is only read by programs, and not written;
-it is the duty of the system administrator to properly create 
+it is the duty of the system administrator to properly create
 and maintain this file.
 Each filesystem is described on a separate line;
 fields on each line are separated by tabs or spaces.
@@ -70,7 +70,7 @@ describes the block special device or
 remote filesystem to be mounted.
 For filesystems of type
 .Tn ffs ,
-the special file name is the block special file name, 
+the special file name is the block special file name,
 and not the character special file name.
 If a program needs the character special file name,
 the program must create it by appending an
@@ -101,23 +101,23 @@ An ISO9660 CD-ROM filesystem.
 .It fdesc
 An implementation of
 .Pa /dev/fd .
-.It ffs 
+.It ffs
 A local
 .Tn UNIX
 filesystem.
 .It kernfs
 Various and sundry kernel statistics.
-.It mfs 
+.It mfs
 A local memory-based
 .Tn UNIX
 filesystem.
 .It msdos
 An MS-DOS FAT filesystem.
-.It nfs 
+.It nfs
 A Sun Microsystems compatible Network File System.
 .It procfs
 A local filesystem containing process information.
-.It swap 
+.It swap
 A disk partition to be used for swapping.
 .It union
 A translucent filesystem.
@@ -221,7 +221,7 @@ program to determine the order in which filesystem checks are done
 at reboot time.
 The root filesystem should be specified with a
 .Fa fs_passno
-of 1, and other filesystems should have a 
+of 1, and other filesystems should have a
 .Fa fs_passno
 of 2.
 Filesystems within a drive will be checked sequentially,
diff --git a/share/man/man5/group.5 b/share/man/man5/group.5
index ca0eae43ca9..31a6bbb22d4 100644
--- a/share/man/man5/group.5
+++ b/share/man/man5/group.5
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-.\"	$OpenBSD: group.5,v 1.3 1998/11/29 15:47:23 aaron Exp $
+.\"	$OpenBSD: group.5,v 1.4 1999/07/09 13:35:38 aaron Exp $
 .\"	$NetBSD: group.5,v 1.4 1995/07/28 06:41:39 phil Exp $
 .\"
 .\" Copyright (c) 1980, 1991, 1993
@@ -76,7 +76,7 @@ field
 is an optional encrypted password.
 This field is rarely used
 and an asterisk is normally placed in it rather than leaving it blank.
-The 
+The
 .Ar member
 field contains the names of users granted the privileges of
 .Ar group .
diff --git a/share/man/man5/netgroup.5 b/share/man/man5/netgroup.5
index 4a1b2ef2118..59169ce0b69 100644
--- a/share/man/man5/netgroup.5
+++ b/share/man/man5/netgroup.5
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-.\"	$OpenBSD: netgroup.5,v 1.6 1999/03/11 01:35:05 pjanzen Exp $
+.\"	$OpenBSD: netgroup.5,v 1.7 1999/07/09 13:35:38 aaron Exp $
 .\"	$NetBSD: netgroup.5,v 1.3 1995/03/18 14:58:34 cgd Exp $
 .\"
 .\" Copyright (c) 1992, 1993
@@ -85,7 +85,7 @@ database.
 .Pp
 These functions operate on the
 .Xr db
-version of the 
+version of the
 .Nm
 .Pq Pa netgroup.db
 file which can be generated using
@@ -94,7 +94,7 @@ If that file is not present, and the system supports NIS, then the
 .Nm
 NIS maps are used. The NIS maps are also used if the
 .Nm
-file contains a 
+file contains a
 .Dq +
 entry.
 .Pp
diff --git a/share/man/man5/networks.5 b/share/man/man5/networks.5
index 263d6da1352..a240277f339 100644
--- a/share/man/man5/networks.5
+++ b/share/man/man5/networks.5
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-.\"	$OpenBSD: networks.5,v 1.7 1998/11/29 15:47:24 aaron Exp $
+.\"	$OpenBSD: networks.5,v 1.8 1999/07/09 13:35:38 aaron Exp $
 .\"	$NetBSD: networks.5,v 1.3 1994/11/30 19:31:23 jtc Exp $
 .\"
 .\" Copyright (c) 1983, 1991, 1993
@@ -61,7 +61,7 @@ indicates the beginning of a comment; characters up to the end of
 the line are not interpreted by routines which search the file.
 This file is normally created from the official network data base
 maintained at the Network Information Control Center
-.Pq Tn NIC , 
+.Pq Tn NIC ,
 though local
 changes may be required to bring it up to date regarding unofficial aliases
 and/or unknown networks.
@@ -76,7 +76,7 @@ from the Internet address manipulation library,
 Network names may contain any printable character other than a field
 delimiter, newline, or comment character.
 .Pp
-The 
+The
 .Nm
 file is largely obsoleted by the network information facilities of the
 name server in the following way:
diff --git a/share/man/man5/passwd.conf.5 b/share/man/man5/passwd.conf.5
index 9d0a9d0ba44..ca45ef801c2 100644
--- a/share/man/man5/passwd.conf.5
+++ b/share/man/man5/passwd.conf.5
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-.\" $OpenBSD: passwd.conf.5,v 1.7 1998/11/26 04:25:59 aaron Exp $
+.\" $OpenBSD: passwd.conf.5,v 1.8 1999/07/09 13:35:38 aaron Exp $
 .\"
 .\" Copyright 1997 Niels Provos <provos@physnet.uni-hamburg.de>
 .\" All rights reserved.
@@ -42,12 +42,12 @@ file, consisting of
 describes the configuration of the password cipher used
 to encrypt local or YP passwords.
 .Pp
-There are default, user and group specific stanzas. If no user 
+There are default, user and group specific stanzas. If no user
 or group
 stanza to a specific option is available, the default stanza
 is used.
 .Pp
-To differentiate between user and group stanzas, groups are prefixed 
+To differentiate between user and group stanzas, groups are prefixed
 with a single dot
 .Pq Sq \&. .
 .Pp
@@ -62,7 +62,7 @@ The cipher to use for local passwords. Possible values are:
 .Dq md5 ,
 and
 .Dq blowfish,<rounds> .
-For 
+For
 .Dq newsalt
 the value of rounds is a 24-bit integer with a minmum of 7250 rounds.
 For
diff --git a/share/man/man5/printcap.5 b/share/man/man5/printcap.5
index af2d191c7ea..da3773fbf8f 100644
--- a/share/man/man5/printcap.5
+++ b/share/man/man5/printcap.5
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-.\"	$OpenBSD: printcap.5,v 1.8 1999/05/23 14:11:05 aaron Exp $
+.\"	$OpenBSD: printcap.5,v 1.9 1999/07/09 13:35:39 aaron Exp $
 .\"	$NetBSD: printcap.5,v 1.7 1998/02/20 12:24:50 hubertf Exp $
 .\"
 .\" Copyright (c) 1983, 1991, 1993
@@ -53,11 +53,11 @@ used to describe line printers.  The spooling system accesses the
 file every time it is used, allowing dynamic
 addition and deletion of printers.  Each entry in the data base
 is used to describe one printer.  This data base may not be
-substituted for, as is possible for 
+substituted for, as is possible for
 .Xr termcap ,
 because it may allow accounting to be bypassed.
 .Pp
-The default printer is normally 
+The default printer is normally
 .Dq lp ,
 though the environment variable
 .Ev PRINTER
@@ -133,7 +133,7 @@ style text files
 If the local line printer driver supports indentation, the daemon
 must understand how to invoke it.
 .Sh FILTERS
-If a printer is specified via 
+If a printer is specified via
 .Cm lp
 (either local or remote),
 the
@@ -142,8 +142,8 @@ daemon creates a pipeline of
 .Dq filters
 to process files for various printer types.
 The pipeline is not set up for remote printers specified via
-.Cm rm 
-unless the local host is the same as the remote printer host 
+.Cm rm
+unless the local host is the same as the remote printer host
 given.
 The filters selected depend on the flags passed to
 .Xr lpr 1 .
@@ -255,7 +255,7 @@ may log either to
 or using
 .Xr syslog 3 ,
 and must not ignore
-.Dv SIGINT . 
+.Dv SIGINT .
 .Sh LOGGING
 Error messages generated by the line printer programs themselves
 (that is, the
diff --git a/share/man/man5/remote.5 b/share/man/man5/remote.5
index af11bee31ad..fb566372469 100644
--- a/share/man/man5/remote.5
+++ b/share/man/man5/remote.5
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-.\"	$OpenBSD: remote.5,v 1.4 1999/05/23 14:11:05 aaron Exp $
+.\"	$OpenBSD: remote.5,v 1.5 1999/07/09 13:35:39 aaron Exp $
 .\"	$NetBSD: remote.5,v 1.4 1997/04/20 00:05:27 mellon Exp $
 .\"
 .\" Copyright (c) 1983, 1991, 1993
@@ -72,11 +72,11 @@ Entries named
 .Dq tip\&*
 and
 .Dq cu\&*
-are used as default entries by 
+are used as default entries by
 .Xr tip ,
 and the
 .Xr cu
-interface to 
+interface to
 .Xr tip ,
 as follows.  When
 .Xr tip
@@ -91,7 +91,7 @@ interface is used, entries of the form
 are used.
 .Sh CAPABILITIES
 Capabilities are either strings (str), numbers (num), or boolean
-flags (bool).  A string capability is specified by 
+flags (bool).  A string capability is specified by
 .Em capability Ns Ar = Ns Em value ;
 for example,
 .Dq dv=/dev/harris .
@@ -109,7 +109,7 @@ Auto call unit type.
 (num)
 The baud rate used in establishing
 a connection to the remote host.
-This is a decimal number. 
+This is a decimal number.
 The default baud rate is 300 baud.
 .It Cm \&cm
 (str)
@@ -134,20 +134,20 @@ Disconnect message sent to the host when a
 disconnect is requested by the user.
 .It Cm \&du
 (bool)
-This host is on a dial-up line. 
+This host is on a dial-up line.
 .It Cm \&dv
 (str)
 .Tn UNIX
-device(s) to open to establish a connection. 
+device(s) to open to establish a connection.
 If this file refers to a terminal line,
 .Xr tip 1
 attempts to perform an exclusive open on the device to insure only
 one user at a time has access to the port.
 .It Cm \&el
 (str)
-Characters marking an end-of-line. 
+Characters marking an end-of-line.
 The default is
-.Dv NULL . 
+.Dv NULL .
 .Dq ~
 escapes are only
 recognized by
@@ -157,7 +157,7 @@ after one of the characters in
 or after a carriage-return.
 .It Cm \&fs
 (str)
-Frame size for transfers. 
+Frame size for transfers.
 The default frame size is equal to
 .Dv BUFSIZ .
 .It Cm \&hd
@@ -168,13 +168,13 @@ echo should be performed.
 (str)
 Input end-of-file marks.
 The default is
-.Dv NULL . 
+.Dv NULL .
 .It Cm \&oe
 (str)
 Output end-of-file string.
 The default is
-.Dv NULL . 
-When 
+.Dv NULL .
+When
 .Xr tip
 is transferring a file, this
 string is sent at end-of-file.
@@ -195,7 +195,7 @@ The default is even parity.
 (str)
 Telephone number(s) for this host.
 If the telephone number field contains
-an @ sign, 
+an @ sign,
 .Xr tip
 searches the file
 .Pa /etc/phones
diff --git a/share/man/man5/rpc.5 b/share/man/man5/rpc.5
index 257c6afac92..9e231e12725 100644
--- a/share/man/man5/rpc.5
+++ b/share/man/man5/rpc.5
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-.\"	$OpenBSD: rpc.5,v 1.3 1998/11/29 15:47:25 aaron Exp $
+.\"	$OpenBSD: rpc.5,v 1.4 1999/07/09 13:35:39 aaron Exp $
 .\"	$NetBSD: rpc.5,v 1.2 1994/11/30 19:31:30 jtc Exp $
 .\"	@(#)rpc.5	2.2 88/08/03 4.0 RPCSRC; from 1.4 87/11/27 SMI;
 .\"
@@ -34,7 +34,7 @@ A
 indicates the beginning of a comment; characters up to the end of
 the line are not interpreted by routines which search the file.
 .Sh EXAMPLES
-Here is an example of the 
+Here is an example of the
 .Pa /etc/rpc
 file from the Sun RPC Source distribution.
 .Bd -literal -offset indent
@@ -68,7 +68,7 @@ status		100024
 bootparam	100026
 ypupdated	100028	ypupdate
 keyserv		100029	keyserver
-tfsd		100037 
+tfsd		100037
 nsed		100038
 nsemntd		100039
 .Ed
diff --git a/share/man/man5/services.5 b/share/man/man5/services.5
index 504abb5b505..022fa635f25 100644
--- a/share/man/man5/services.5
+++ b/share/man/man5/services.5
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-.\"	$OpenBSD: services.5,v 1.5 1999/05/23 14:11:05 aaron Exp $
+.\"	$OpenBSD: services.5,v 1.6 1999/07/09 13:35:39 aaron Exp $
 .\"	$NetBSD: services.5,v 1.3 1994/11/30 19:31:31 jtc Exp $
 .\"
 .\" Copyright (c) 1983, 1991, 1993
@@ -58,7 +58,7 @@ aliases
 .Pp
 Items are separated by any number of blanks and/or
 tab characters.  The port number and protocol name
-are considered a single 
+are considered a single
 .Em item ;
 a
 .Dq /
diff --git a/share/man/man5/stab.5 b/share/man/man5/stab.5
index 3e17f0bc596..33bb6f32d95 100644
--- a/share/man/man5/stab.5
+++ b/share/man/man5/stab.5
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-.\"	$OpenBSD: stab.5,v 1.6 1999/05/23 14:11:05 aaron Exp $
+.\"	$OpenBSD: stab.5,v 1.7 1999/07/09 13:35:39 aaron Exp $
 .\"	$NetBSD: stab.5,v 1.3 1994/11/30 19:31:33 jtc Exp $
 .\"
 .\" Copyright (c) 1980, 1991, 1993
@@ -96,7 +96,7 @@ struct nlist {
 The low bits of the
 .Fa n_type
 field are used to place a symbol into
-at most one segment, according to 
+at most one segment, according to
 the following masks, defined in
 .Aq Pa a.out.h .
 A symbol can be in none of these segments by having none of these segment
@@ -177,7 +177,7 @@ and
 .Fa n_value
 fields
 of the given
-.Fa n_type . 
+.Fa n_type .
 .Em sdb
 uses the
 .Fa n_desc
diff --git a/share/man/man5/utmp.5 b/share/man/man5/utmp.5
index eb9b0c07a7e..5d324c09f1b 100644
--- a/share/man/man5/utmp.5
+++ b/share/man/man5/utmp.5
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-.\"	$OpenBSD: utmp.5,v 1.10 1999/05/23 14:11:05 aaron Exp $
+.\"	$OpenBSD: utmp.5,v 1.11 1999/07/09 13:35:39 aaron Exp $
 .\"	$NetBSD: utmp.5,v 1.5 1994/11/30 19:31:35 jtc Exp $
 .\"
 .\" Copyright (c) 1980, 1991, 1993
@@ -60,7 +60,7 @@ file.
 .Pp
 .Nm wtmp
 can grow rapidly on busy systems, so daily or weekly rotation
-is recommended. 
+is recommended.
 If any one of these files does not exist, it is not created.
 They must be created manually and are maintained by
 .Xr newsyslog 8 .
@@ -101,7 +101,7 @@ see
 .Xr login 1 ) .
 The
 .Xr login
-program then records the new login time in the 
+program then records the new login time in the
 .Nm lastlog
 file.
 .Pp
diff --git a/share/man/man7/ascii.7 b/share/man/man7/ascii.7
index ff6fc131b51..b16e9e7307e 100644
--- a/share/man/man7/ascii.7
+++ b/share/man/man7/ascii.7
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-.\"	$OpenBSD: ascii.7,v 1.2 1998/11/29 15:47:25 aaron Exp $
+.\"	$OpenBSD: ascii.7,v 1.3 1999/07/09 13:35:37 aaron Exp $
 .\"	$NetBSD: ascii.7,v 1.3 1994/11/30 19:07:06 jtc Exp $
 .\"
 .\" Copyright (c) 1989, 1990, 1993
@@ -50,18 +50,18 @@ set:
 000 nul  001 soh  002 stx  003 etx  004 eot  005 enq  006 ack  007 bel
 010 bs   011 ht   012 nl   013 vt   014 np   015 cr   016 so   017 si
 020 dle  021 dc1  022 dc2  023 dc3  024 dc4  025 nak  026 syn  027 etb
-030 can  031 em   032 sub  033 esc  034 fs   035 gs   036 rs   037 us 
-040 sp   041  !   042  "   043  #   044  $   045  %   046  &   047  ' 
-050  (   051  )   052  *   053  +   054  ,   055  -   056  .   057  / 
-060  0   061  1   062  2   063  3   064  4   065  5   066  6   067  7 
-070  8   071  9   072  :   073  ;   074  <   075  =   076  >   077  ? 
-100  @   101  A   102  B   103  C   104  D   105  E   106  F   107  G 
-110  H   111  I   112  J   113  K   114  L   115  M   116  N   117  O 
-120  P   121  Q   122  R   123  S   124  T   125  U   126  V   127  W 
-130  X   131  Y   132  Z   133  [   134  \e\   135  ]   136  ^   137  _ 
-140  `   141  a   142  b   143  c   144  d   145  e   146  f   147  g 
-150  h   151  i   152  j   153  k   154  l   155  m   156  n   157  o 
-160  p   161  q   162  r   163  s   164  t   165  u   166  v   167  w 
+030 can  031 em   032 sub  033 esc  034 fs   035 gs   036 rs   037 us
+040 sp   041  !   042  "   043  #   044  $   045  %   046  &   047  '
+050  (   051  )   052  *   053  +   054  ,   055  -   056  .   057  /
+060  0   061  1   062  2   063  3   064  4   065  5   066  6   067  7
+070  8   071  9   072  :   073  ;   074  <   075  =   076  >   077  ?
+100  @   101  A   102  B   103  C   104  D   105  E   106  F   107  G
+110  H   111  I   112  J   113  K   114  L   115  M   116  N   117  O
+120  P   121  Q   122  R   123  S   124  T   125  U   126  V   127  W
+130  X   131  Y   132  Z   133  [   134  \e\   135  ]   136  ^   137  _
+140  `   141  a   142  b   143  c   144  d   145  e   146  f   147  g
+150  h   151  i   152  j   153  k   154  l   155  m   156  n   157  o
+160  p   161  q   162  r   163  s   164  t   165  u   166  v   167  w
 170  x   171  y   172  z   173  {   174  |   175  }   176  ~   177 del
 .Ed
 .Pp
@@ -70,20 +70,20 @@ The
 set:
 .Bd -literal -offset left
 00 nul   01 soh   02 stx   03 etx   04 eot   05 enq   06 ack   07 bel
-08 bs    09 ht    0a nl    0b vt    0c np    0d cr    0e so    0f si 
+08 bs    09 ht    0a nl    0b vt    0c np    0d cr    0e so    0f si
 10 dle   11 dc1   12 dc2   13 dc3   14 dc4   15 nak   16 syn   17 etb
-18 can   19 em    1a sub   1b esc   1c fs    1d gs    1e rs    1f us 
-20 sp    21  !    22  "    23  #    24  $    25  %    26  &    27  ' 
-28  (    29  )    2a  *    2b  +    2c  ,    2d  -    2e  .    2f  / 
-30  0    31  1    32  2    33  3    34  4    35  5    36  6    37  7 
-38  8    39  9    3a  :    3b  ;    3c  <    3d  =    3e  >    3f  ? 
-40  @    41  A    42  B    43  C    44  D    45  E    46  F    47  G 
-48  H    49  I    4a  J    4b  K    4c  L    4d  M    4e  N    4f  O 
-50  P    51  Q    52  R    53  S    54  T    55  U    56  V    57  W 
-58  X    59  Y    5a  Z    5b  [    5c  \e\    5d  ]    5e  ^    5f  _ 
-60  \`    61  a    62  b    63  c    64  d    65  e    66  f    67  g 
-68  h    69  i    6a  j    6b  k    6c  l    6d  m    6e  n    6f  o 
-70  p    71  q    72  r    73  s    74  t    75  u    76  v    77  w 
+18 can   19 em    1a sub   1b esc   1c fs    1d gs    1e rs    1f us
+20 sp    21  !    22  "    23  #    24  $    25  %    26  &    27  '
+28  (    29  )    2a  *    2b  +    2c  ,    2d  -    2e  .    2f  /
+30  0    31  1    32  2    33  3    34  4    35  5    36  6    37  7
+38  8    39  9    3a  :    3b  ;    3c  <    3d  =    3e  >    3f  ?
+40  @    41  A    42  B    43  C    44  D    45  E    46  F    47  G
+48  H    49  I    4a  J    4b  K    4c  L    4d  M    4e  N    4f  O
+50  P    51  Q    52  R    53  S    54  T    55  U    56  V    57  W
+58  X    59  Y    5a  Z    5b  [    5c  \e\    5d  ]    5e  ^    5f  _
+60  \`    61  a    62  b    63  c    64  d    65  e    66  f    67  g
+68  h    69  i    6a  j    6b  k    6c  l    6d  m    6e  n    6f  o
+70  p    71  q    72  r    73  s    74  t    75  u    76  v    77  w
 78  x    79  y    7a  z    7b  {    7c  |    7d  }    7e  ~    7f del
 .Ed
 .Pp
@@ -92,20 +92,20 @@ The
 set:
 .Bd -literal -offset left
   0 nul    1 soh    2 stx    3 etx    4 eot    5 enq    6 ack    7 bel
-  8 bs     9 ht    10 nl    11 vt    12 np    13 cr    14 so    15 si 
+  8 bs     9 ht    10 nl    11 vt    12 np    13 cr    14 so    15 si
  16 dle   17 dc1   18 dc2   19 dc3   20 dc4   21 nak   22 syn   23 etb
- 24 can   25 em    26 sub   27 esc   28 fs    29 gs    30 rs    31 us 
- 32 sp    33  !    34  "    35  #    36  $    37  %    38  &    39  ' 
- 40  (    41  )    42  *    43  +    44  ,    45  -    46  .    47  / 
- 48  0    49  1    50  2    51  3    52  4    53  5    54  6    55  7 
- 56  8    57  9    58  :    59  ;    60  <    61  =    62  >    63  ? 
- 64  @    65  A    66  B    67  C    68  D    69  E    70  F    71  G 
- 72  H    73  I    74  J    75  K    76  L    77  M    78  N    79  O 
- 80  P    81  Q    82  R    83  S    84  T    85  U    86  V    87  W 
- 88  X    89  Y    90  Z    91  [    92  \e\    93  ]    94  ^    95  _ 
- 96  `    97  a    98  b    99  c   100  d   101  e   102  f   103  g 
-104  h   105  i   106  j   107  k   108  l   109  m   110  n   111  o 
-112  p   113  q   114  r   115  s   116  t   117  u   118  v   119  w 
+ 24 can   25 em    26 sub   27 esc   28 fs    29 gs    30 rs    31 us
+ 32 sp    33  !    34  "    35  #    36  $    37  %    38  &    39  '
+ 40  (    41  )    42  *    43  +    44  ,    45  -    46  .    47  /
+ 48  0    49  1    50  2    51  3    52  4    53  5    54  6    55  7
+ 56  8    57  9    58  :    59  ;    60  <    61  =    62  >    63  ?
+ 64  @    65  A    66  B    67  C    68  D    69  E    70  F    71  G
+ 72  H    73  I    74  J    75  K    76  L    77  M    78  N    79  O
+ 80  P    81  Q    82  R    83  S    84  T    85  U    86  V    87  W
+ 88  X    89  Y    90  Z    91  [    92  \e\    93  ]    94  ^    95  _
+ 96  `    97  a    98  b    99  c   100  d   101  e   102  f   103  g
+104  h   105  i   106  j   107  k   108  l   109  m   110  n   111  o
+112  p   113  q   114  r   115  s   116  t   117  u   118  v   119  w
 120  x   121  y   122  z   123  {   124  |   125  }   126  ~   127 del
 .Ed
 .Sh FILES
diff --git a/share/man/man7/environ.7 b/share/man/man7/environ.7
index 3c8ca3fcac0..44eec731eb9 100644
--- a/share/man/man7/environ.7
+++ b/share/man/man7/environ.7
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-.\"	$OpenBSD: environ.7,v 1.5 1999/05/23 14:11:08 aaron Exp $
+.\"	$OpenBSD: environ.7,v 1.6 1999/07/09 13:35:37 aaron Exp $
 .\"	$NetBSD: environ.7,v 1.4 1995/07/03 19:45:07 jtc Exp $
 .\"
 .\" Copyright (c) 1983, 1990, 1993
@@ -58,7 +58,7 @@ The size of the block units used by several commands, most notably
 and
 .Xr ls 1 .
 .Ev BLOCKSIZE
-may be specified in units of a byte by specifying a number, 
+may be specified in units of a byte by specifying a number,
 in units of a kilobyte by specifying a number followed by
 .Dq K
 or
@@ -92,7 +92,7 @@ The sequence of directories, separated by colons, searched by
 .Xr execvp 3 ,
 etc. when looking for an executable file.
 Initially,
-.Ev PATH 
+.Ev PATH
 is set to
 .Dq /usr/bin:/bin
 by
diff --git a/share/man/man7/hier.7 b/share/man/man7/hier.7
index de5b427486e..1e9a1ec4ae9 100644
--- a/share/man/man7/hier.7
+++ b/share/man/man7/hier.7
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-.\"	$OpenBSD: hier.7,v 1.10 1999/05/16 19:57:38 alex Exp $
+.\"	$OpenBSD: hier.7,v 1.11 1999/07/09 13:35:37 aaron Exp $
 .\"	$NetBSD: hier.7,v 1.7 1994/11/30 19:07:10 jtc Exp $
 .\"
 .\" Copyright (c) 1990, 1993
@@ -51,7 +51,7 @@ Alternate (backup) location for the root user's home directory.
 User utilities fundamental to both single and multi-user environments.
 .It Li /bsd
 Pure kernel executable (the operating system loaded into memory
-at boot-time).  
+at boot-time).
 .It Li /dev/
 Block and character device files.
 .Pp
@@ -59,7 +59,7 @@ Block and character device files.
 .It Li MAKEDEV
 Script for creating device files (see
 .Xr makedev 8 ) .
-.It Li fd/ 
+.It Li fd/
 File descriptor files (see
 .Xr fd 4 ) .
 .El
@@ -81,14 +81,14 @@ Local timezone information (see
 .It Li disklabels/
 Backup disklabels (see
 .Xr disklabel 8 ) .
-.It Li kerberosIV/ 
+.It Li kerberosIV/
 Configuration files for the Kerberos version IV system (see
 .Xr kerberos 1 ) .
-.It Li mtree/ 
+.It Li mtree/
 .Xr mtree
 configuration files (see
 .Xr mtree 8 ) .
-.It Li namedb/ 
+.It Li namedb/
 .Xr named
 configuration files (see
 .Xr named 8 ) .
@@ -109,7 +109,7 @@ System programs and administration utilities
 fundamental to both single and multi-user environments.
 .It Li /stand/
 Programs used in a stand-alone environment.
-.It Li /tmp/ 
+.It Li /tmp/
 Temporary files, usually an
 .Xr mfs 8
 memory-based filesystem (the contents
@@ -240,13 +240,13 @@ Example
 .Dq \&.
 (dot) files for new accounts.
 .It Li tabset/
-Tab description files for a variety of terminals; used in 
+Tab description files for a variety of terminals; used in
 the termcap file (see
 .Xr termcap 5 ) .
 .It Li tmac/
 Text processing macros (see
 .Xr nroff 1
-and 
+and
 .Xr troff 1 ) .
 .It Li zoneinfo/
 Timezone configuration information (see
@@ -302,7 +302,7 @@ Source for files in
 Multi-purpose log, temporary, transient, and spool files.
 .Pp
 .Bl -tag -width "preserve/" -compact
-.It Li account/ 
+.It Li account/
 System accounting files.
 .Pp
 .Bl -tag -width Fl -compact
@@ -317,11 +317,11 @@ command scheduling files (see
 .Xr at 1 ) .
 .It Li backups/
 Miscellaneous backup files.
-.It Li db/ 
+.It Li db/
 Miscellaneous automatically generated system-specific database files.
-.It Li games/ 
+.It Li games/
 Miscellaneous game status and log files.
-.It Li log/ 
+.It Li log/
 Miscellaneous system log files.
 .Pp
 .Bl -tag -width Fl -compact
@@ -330,13 +330,13 @@ Login/logout log (see
 .Xr wtmp 5 ) .
 .El
 .Pp
-.It Li mail/ 
+.It Li mail/
 User mailbox files.
 .It Li preserve/
 Temporary home of files preserved after an accidental death
 of an editor (see
 .Xr ex 1 ) .
-.It Li quotas/ 
+.It Li quotas/
 Filesystem quota information files.
 .It Li run/
 System information files describing various info about the
@@ -348,32 +348,32 @@ Database of current users (see
 .Xr utmp 5 ) .
 .El
 .Pp
-.It Li rwho/ 
+.It Li rwho/
 .Xr rwho
 data files (see
 .Xr rwhod 8 ,
 .Xr rwho 1 ,
 and
 .Xr ruptime 1 ) .
-.It Li spool/ 
+.It Li spool/
 Miscellaneous printer and mail system spooling directories.
 .Pp
 .Bl -tag -width Fl -compact
-.It Li ftp/ 
+.It Li ftp/
 Commonly ~ftp; the anonymous ftp root directory.
-.It Li mqueue/ 
+.It Li mqueue/
 Undelivered mail queue (see
 .Xr sendmail 8 ) .
 .It Li output/
 Line printer spooling directories.
-.It Li uucp/ 
+.It Li uucp/
 .Xr uucp
 spool directory.
 .It Li uucppublic/
 Commonly ~uucp; public uucp temporary directory.
 .El
 .Pp
-.It Li tmp/ 
+.It Li tmp/
 Temporary files that are kept between system reboots.
 .El
 .El
@@ -386,7 +386,7 @@ Temporary files that are kept between system reboots.
 .Xr whatis 1 ,
 .Xr whereis 1 ,
 .Xr which 1 ,
-.Xr fsck 8 
+.Xr fsck 8
 .Sh HISTORY
 A
 .Nm
diff --git a/share/man/man7/mdoc.samples.7 b/share/man/man7/mdoc.samples.7
index 27626f93935..2f67423a06b 100644
--- a/share/man/man7/mdoc.samples.7
+++ b/share/man/man7/mdoc.samples.7
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-.\"	$OpenBSD: mdoc.samples.7,v 1.18 1999/07/06 01:44:29 aaron Exp $
+.\"	$OpenBSD: mdoc.samples.7,v 1.19 1999/07/09 13:35:37 aaron Exp $
 .\"	$NetBSD: mdoc.samples.7,v 1.5 1996/04/03 20:17:34 jtc Exp $
 .\"
 .\" Copyright (c) 1990, 1993
@@ -309,7 +309,7 @@ manual
 .Xr mdoc 7 .
 This is a technical
 .Em faux pas
-as almost all of the macros in 
+as almost all of the macros in
 .Nm \-mdoc
 are parsed, but as it was cumbersome to constantly refer to macros
 as being callable and being able to call other macros,
@@ -1133,7 +1133,7 @@ anywhere else in the man page without problems, but in the
 .Sx SYNOPSIS
 section it causes a line break after its use. Its main purpose
 is to present the function type in kernel normal form
-of a section two or three man page by forcing the 
+of a section two or three man page by forcing the
 function name to appear on the next line.
 .Pp
 .Dl Usage: .Ft type ... \*(Pu
diff --git a/share/man/man7/ports.7 b/share/man/man7/ports.7
index cd88e08ed6d..42504afcebc 100644
--- a/share/man/man7/ports.7
+++ b/share/man/man7/ports.7
@@ -23,7 +23,7 @@
 .\" (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF
 .\" THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
 .\"
-.\" $OpenBSD: ports.7,v 1.5 1999/05/23 14:11:09 aaron Exp $
+.\" $OpenBSD: ports.7,v 1.6 1999/07/09 13:35:37 aaron Exp $
 .\" $FreeBSD: ports.7,v 1.7 1998/06/23 04:38:50 hoek Exp $
 .\"
 .Dd January 25, 1998
@@ -37,13 +37,13 @@ The
 .Nm OpenBSD Ports Collection
 (shamelessly stolen from the FreeBSD Ports Collection) offers a simple way
 for users and administrators to install applications.
-Each 
+Each
 .Em port
 contains any patches necessary to make the original
 application source code compile and run on BSD.  Compiling an
 application is as simple as typing
 .Ic make
-in the port directory!  The 
+in the port directory!  The
 .Pa Makefile
 automatically fetches the
 application source code, either from a local disk or via ftp, unpacks it
diff --git a/share/man/man8/afterboot.8 b/share/man/man8/afterboot.8
index a5724164ceb..9c1fdd09204 100644
--- a/share/man/man8/afterboot.8
+++ b/share/man/man8/afterboot.8
@@ -18,7 +18,7 @@ For example, to view the manual page on the
 .Xr ls 1
 command, type:
 .Ic man 1 ls .
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\" XXX This should be an enumerated list
 .\"
 .Ss Login
@@ -467,7 +467,7 @@ Check what is running by typing
 as root
 and see if anything unexpected is present.
 Do you need anything else?  Do you wish to change things?  e.g. if you do not
-like root getting standard output of the daily scripts, and want only 
+like root getting standard output of the daily scripts, and want only
 the security scripts that are mailed internally, you can type
 .Ic crontab -e
 and change some of the lines to read:
@@ -648,7 +648,7 @@ etc.
 .Xr route 8 ,
 .Xr umount 8 ,
 .Xr vipw 8 ,
-.Xr ypbind 8 
+.Xr ypbind 8
 .Sh HISTORY
 This document first appeared in
 .Ox 2.2 .
diff --git a/share/man/man8/boot_config.8 b/share/man/man8/boot_config.8
index 80c578549a1..f4c4694409d 100644
--- a/share/man/man8/boot_config.8
+++ b/share/man/man8/boot_config.8
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-.\"	$OpenBSD: boot_config.8,v 1.8 1999/05/23 14:11:24 aaron Exp $
+.\"	$OpenBSD: boot_config.8,v 1.9 1999/07/09 13:35:36 aaron Exp $
 .\"
 .\" Copyright (c) 1996 Mats O Jansson
 .\" All rights reserved.
@@ -50,7 +50,7 @@ option when OpenBSD prompts for a kernel to boot:
 use ? for file list, or carriage return for defaults
 use hd(1,a)/bsd to boot sd0 when sd0 is also installed
 .No "Boot: [[[wd(0,a)]/bsd][-abcdrs]] :" Ic -c
-Booting... 
+Booting...
 avail mem = 28188672
 using 430 buffers containing 1761280 bytes of memory
 User Kernel Config
@@ -163,7 +163,7 @@ an attribute.
 UKC>
 .Ed
 .Pp
-It is possible to add new devices, but only devices that were linked into the 
+It is possible to add new devices, but only devices that were linked into the
 kernel. If a new device is added, following devices will be renumbered.
 .Pp
 .Bd -literal
diff --git a/share/man/man8/compat_freebsd.8 b/share/man/man8/compat_freebsd.8
index 47fcaa10c05..f663b34c6c1 100644
--- a/share/man/man8/compat_freebsd.8
+++ b/share/man/man8/compat_freebsd.8
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-.\"	$OpenBSD: compat_freebsd.8,v 1.5 1998/09/13 03:50:23 aaron Exp $
+.\"	$OpenBSD: compat_freebsd.8,v 1.6 1999/07/09 13:35:36 aaron Exp $
 .\"	$NetBSD: compat_linux.8,v 1.1 1995/03/05 23:30:36 fvdl Exp $
 .\"
 .\" Copyright (c) 1995 Frank van der Linden
@@ -39,9 +39,9 @@
 .Sh DESCRIPTION
 OpenBSD supports running FreeBSD binaries. Most binaries should work,
 except programs that use FreeBSD-specific features. These include
-i386-specific calls, such as syscons utilities, and audio devices. 
+i386-specific calls, such as syscons utilities, and audio devices.
 .Pp
-The FreeBSD compatibility feature is active for kernels compiled 
+The FreeBSD compatibility feature is active for kernels compiled
 with the
 .Nm COMPAT_FREEBSD
 option enabled.
@@ -165,8 +165,8 @@ they don't conflict with their OpenBSD counterparts. A good idea
 would be to install them in /usr/local/bin as ldconfig-freebsd and
 ldd-freebsd.
 .Pp
-Run the FreeBSD ldconfig program with directory arguments in 
-which the FreeBSD runtime linker should look for shared libs. 
+Run the FreeBSD ldconfig program with directory arguments in
+which the FreeBSD runtime linker should look for shared libs.
 /usr/lib are standard, you could run like the following:
 .Pp
 .Bl -tag -width 123 -compact -offset indent
@@ -175,10 +175,10 @@ which the FreeBSD runtime linker should look for shared libs.
 .It me@openbsd% ldconfig-freebsd /usr/X11R6/lib /usr/local/lib
 .El
 .Pp
-Note that argument directories of ldconfig are 
+Note that argument directories of ldconfig are
 mapped to /emul/freebsd/XXXX by
 OpenBSD's compat code, and should exist as such on your system.
-Make sure /emul/freebsd/var/run/ld.so.hints exists when you run 
+Make sure /emul/freebsd/var/run/ld.so.hints exists when you run
 FreeBSD's ldconfig, if not, you may lose OpenBSD's /var/run/ld.so.hints.
 
 FreeBSD ldconfig should be statically
@@ -264,7 +264,7 @@ libXt.so.6.0           XFree86-3.1.1/X311bin.tgz
 .\" libXt.so.3             oldlibs
 .Ed
 .Pp
-The Files called ``bindist.??'' are tar-ed, gzipped and split, 
+The Files called ``bindist.??'' are tar-ed, gzipped and split,
 so you can extract contents by ``cat bindist.?? | tar zpxf -''.
 .Pp
 Extract the files from these gzipped tarfiles in your /emul/freebsd directory
diff --git a/share/man/man8/compat_svr4.8 b/share/man/man8/compat_svr4.8
index a43dd6de7ba..e946c32a223 100644
--- a/share/man/man8/compat_svr4.8
+++ b/share/man/man8/compat_svr4.8
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-.\"	$OpenBSD: compat_svr4.8,v 1.6 1999/05/23 14:11:24 aaron Exp $
+.\"	$OpenBSD: compat_svr4.8,v 1.7 1999/07/09 13:35:36 aaron Exp $
 .\"	$NetBSD: compat_svr4.8,v 1.1 1996/07/06 17:14:50 christos Exp $
 .\"
 .\" Copyright (c) 1996 Christos Zoulas
@@ -30,7 +30,7 @@
 .\" (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF
 .\" THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
 .\"
-.\"	Stolen from compat_linux.8,v 1.2 1995/10/16 20:17:59 fvdl 
+.\"	Stolen from compat_linux.8,v 1.2 1995/10/16 20:17:59 fvdl
 .\"
 .Dd July 6, 1996
 .Dt compat_svr4 8
diff --git a/share/man/man8/compat_ultrix.8 b/share/man/man8/compat_ultrix.8
index 9740e811d0c..d3a987f00aa 100644
--- a/share/man/man8/compat_ultrix.8
+++ b/share/man/man8/compat_ultrix.8
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-.\"	$OpenBSD: compat_ultrix.8,v 1.5 1999/05/23 14:11:27 aaron Exp $
+.\"	$OpenBSD: compat_ultrix.8,v 1.6 1999/07/09 13:35:36 aaron Exp $
 .\"
 .\" Copyright (c) 1997 Jonathan Stone
 .\" All rights reserved.
@@ -46,11 +46,11 @@ Most executables will work.  The exceptions include programs that use
 proprietary, Ultrix-specific features (LAT, CI support, DECnet
 support) and various system calls, ioctl()'s, or Ultrix kernel
 semantics that are difficult to emulate (e.g., Ultrix packetfilter) or
-buggy (e.g., Ultrix YP). 
+buggy (e.g., Ultrix YP).
 .Pp
 All Ultrix executables are static, so no shared libraries are required
 for Ultrix compatiblity. However, Ultrix is based on a
-.Bx 4.3 
+.Bx 4.3
 alpha
 release.  Ultrix commands and libraries are often much older than
 their OpenBSD or even SunOS 4.x equivalents, and may require incompatible
@@ -88,7 +88,7 @@ lookups for all Ultrix name services.
 .Sh BUGS
 RISC Ultrix YP(NIS) is known to not work.  The Ultrix YP libraries have
 a consistent endian-ness bug. Ultrix YP client will not inter-operate
-with the OpenBSD 
+with the OpenBSD
 .Xr ypbind 8
 process.  The only workaround is to use
 /etc/svc.conf to disable YP(NIS).
@@ -96,7 +96,7 @@ process.  The only workaround is to use
 The ndbm hashed-password file used by Ultrix are incompatible with the
 db hashed-password file used by OpenBSD. There is no good solution for
 this. (YP would be a good one, if Ultrix YP worked.)
-.Pp 
+.Pp
 The API used by Xservers to talk to the kernel is currently compatible
 with Ultrix 4.1.  An implementation of the Ultrix 4.2 Xws interface
 (used by X11R6) is in progress.
diff --git a/share/man/man8/diskless.8 b/share/man/man8/diskless.8
index 98f3105c8ed..bdd68df3ea2 100644
--- a/share/man/man8/diskless.8
+++ b/share/man/man8/diskless.8
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-.\"	$OpenBSD: diskless.8,v 1.8 1999/05/07 22:03:09 jason Exp $
+.\"	$OpenBSD: diskless.8,v 1.9 1999/07/09 13:35:36 aaron Exp $
 .\"	$NetBSD: diskless.8,v 1.7.4.1 1996/05/30 18:58:10 cgd Exp $
 .\"
 .\"
@@ -152,7 +152,7 @@ Assuming the client's hostname is to be
 .Pp
 .Bl -tag -width 2.1 -compact
 .It 1.
-Add an entry to 
+Add an entry to
 .Pa /etc/ethers
 corresponding to the client's ethernet address:
 .Bd -literal -offset indent -compact
diff --git a/share/man/man8/makedev.8 b/share/man/man8/makedev.8
index f490ee79d05..cba183047a9 100644
--- a/share/man/man8/makedev.8
+++ b/share/man/man8/makedev.8
@@ -45,10 +45,10 @@
 .Sh DESCRIPTION
 .Nm MAKEDEV
 is a shell script normally used to install
-special files.  It resides in the 
+special files.  It resides in the
 .Pa /dev
 directory, as this is the normal location of special files.
-Arguments to 
+Arguments to
 .Nm MAKEDEV
 are usually of the form
 .Ar device-name Ns Sy \&?
@@ -83,7 +83,7 @@ console cassette device(s),
 devices would be made for the appropriate system.
 .It Sy local
 Create those devices specific to the local site.  This
-request causes the shell file 
+request causes the shell file
 .Pa /dev/MAKEDEV.local
 to be executed.  Site specific commands, such as those
 used to setup dialup lines as
@@ -92,7 +92,7 @@ should be included
 in this file.
 .El
 .Pp
-Since all devices are created using 
+Since all devices are created using
 .Xr mknod 8 ,
 this shell script is useful only to the super-user.
 .Sh DIAGNOSTICS
diff --git a/share/man/man8/man8.atari/MAKEDEV.8 b/share/man/man8/man8.atari/MAKEDEV.8
index f6c172e8b87..7ef92d8e5fb 100644
--- a/share/man/man8/man8.atari/MAKEDEV.8
+++ b/share/man/man8/man8.atari/MAKEDEV.8
@@ -145,5 +145,5 @@ The special file directory.
 .Sh SEE ALSO
 .Xr intro 4 ,
 .Xr config 8 ,
-.Xr mknod 8 , 
+.Xr mknod 8 ,
 .Xr special 8
diff --git a/share/man/man8/man8.hp300/MAKEDEV.8 b/share/man/man8/man8.hp300/MAKEDEV.8
index 31e94a32bba..52fc332d4d7 100644
--- a/share/man/man8/man8.hp300/MAKEDEV.8
+++ b/share/man/man8/man8.hp300/MAKEDEV.8
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-.\"	$OpenBSD: MAKEDEV.8,v 1.6 1999/05/23 14:11:23 aaron Exp $
+.\"	$OpenBSD: MAKEDEV.8,v 1.7 1999/07/09 13:35:35 aaron Exp $
 .\"
 .\" Copyright (c) 1997, Jason Downs.  All rights reserved.
 .\"
@@ -76,7 +76,7 @@
 .Sh DESCRIPTION
 The shell script
 .Nm MAKEDEV ,
-found in the 
+found in the
 .Pa /dev
 directory, is used to create the common special files.
 See
@@ -161,5 +161,5 @@ The special file directory.
 .Sh SEE ALSO
 .Xr intro 4 ,
 .Xr config 8 ,
-.Xr mknod 8 , 
+.Xr mknod 8 ,
 .Xr special 8
diff --git a/share/man/man8/man8.hp300/crash.8 b/share/man/man8/man8.hp300/crash.8
index d72ec57e986..c9968efe239 100644
--- a/share/man/man8/man8.hp300/crash.8
+++ b/share/man/man8/man8.hp300/crash.8
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-.\"	$OpenBSD: crash.8,v 1.3 1999/06/05 04:16:07 aaron Exp $
+.\"	$OpenBSD: crash.8,v 1.4 1999/07/09 13:35:35 aaron Exp $
 .\"
 .\" Copyright (c) 1990, 1991 Regents of the University of California.
 .\" All rights reserved.
@@ -197,7 +197,7 @@ for details.
 .Pp
 To analyze a dump you should begin by running
 .Xr adb 1
-with the 
+with the
 .Fl k
 flag on the system load image and core dump.
 If the core image is the result of a panic,
diff --git a/share/man/man8/man8.i386/MAKEDEV.8 b/share/man/man8/man8.i386/MAKEDEV.8
index e04049aee75..69e61df9b07 100644
--- a/share/man/man8/man8.i386/MAKEDEV.8
+++ b/share/man/man8/man8.i386/MAKEDEV.8
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-.\"	$OpenBSD: MAKEDEV.8,v 1.9 1999/05/23 14:11:23 aaron Exp $
+.\"	$OpenBSD: MAKEDEV.8,v 1.10 1999/07/09 13:35:36 aaron Exp $
 .\"
 .\" Copyright (c) 1997, Jason Downs.  All rights reserved.
 .\"
@@ -186,5 +186,5 @@ The special file directory.
 .Sh SEE ALSO
 .Xr intro 4 ,
 .Xr config 8 ,
-.Xr mknod 8 , 
+.Xr mknod 8 ,
 .Xr special 8
diff --git a/share/man/man8/man8.i386/boot.com.8 b/share/man/man8/man8.i386/boot.com.8
index ccc926fd996..5a6c514f767 100644
--- a/share/man/man8/man8.i386/boot.com.8
+++ b/share/man/man8/man8.i386/boot.com.8
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-.\"     $OpenBSD: boot.com.8,v 1.3 1999/05/23 14:11:23 aaron Exp $
+.\"     $OpenBSD: boot.com.8,v 1.4 1999/07/09 13:35:36 aaron Exp $
 .\"
 .\" Copyright (c) 1989, 1990, 1993
 .\"     The Regents of the University of California.  All rights reserved.
@@ -59,7 +59,7 @@ that time, the default kernel
 .Em bsd
 is loaded from the root directory of the DOS C: partition.
 .Sh CAVEATS
-The file 
+The file
 .Pa /usr/mdec/boot.com
 and a valid kernel file must be copied to the root directory
 of the DOS C: partition.
diff --git a/share/man/man8/man8.sun3/MAKEDEV.8 b/share/man/man8/man8.sun3/MAKEDEV.8
index b0359ccb25f..be3e7626ead 100644
--- a/share/man/man8/man8.sun3/MAKEDEV.8
+++ b/share/man/man8/man8.sun3/MAKEDEV.8
@@ -132,5 +132,5 @@ The special file directory.
 .Sh SEE ALSO
 .Xr intro 4 ,
 .Xr config 8 ,
-.Xr mknod 8 , 
+.Xr mknod 8 ,
 .Xr special 8
diff --git a/share/man/man8/man8.vax/drtest.8 b/share/man/man8/man8.vax/drtest.8
index 72af19331ef..fc930e032e8 100644
--- a/share/man/man8/man8.vax/drtest.8
+++ b/share/man/man8/man8.vax/drtest.8
@@ -30,7 +30,7 @@
 .\" SUCH DAMAGE.
 .\"
 .\"     from: @(#)drtest.8	6.3 (Berkeley) 3/16/91
-.\"	$Id: drtest.8,v 1.3 1999/05/23 14:11:22 aaron Exp $
+.\"	$Id: drtest.8,v 1.4 1999/07/09 13:35:35 aaron Exp $
 .\"
 .Dd March 16, 1991
 .Dt DRTEST 8
@@ -40,19 +40,19 @@
 .Nd standalone disk test program
 .Sh DESCRIPTION
 .Nm Drtest
-is a standalone program used to read a disk 
-track by track. 
-It was primarily intended as a test program 
+is a standalone program used to read a disk
+track by track.
+It was primarily intended as a test program
 for new standalone drivers, but has shown
-useful in other contexts as well, such as 
+useful in other contexts as well, such as
 verifying disks and running speed
 tests. For example, when a disk has been formatted
 (by
 .Xr format 8 ) ,
 you can check that
-hard errors has been taken care of by running 
+hard errors has been taken care of by running
 .Nm drtest .
-No hard errors should be found, but in many cases 
+No hard errors should be found, but in many cases
 quite a few soft
 .Tn ECC
 errors will be reported.
@@ -62,10 +62,10 @@ While
 is running, the cylinder number is printed on
 the console for every 10th cylinder read.
 .Sh EXAMPLE
-A sample run of 
+A sample run of
 .Xr drtest
-is shown below.  
-In this example (using a 750), 
+is shown below.
+In this example (using a 750),
 .Nm drtest
 is loaded from the root file system;
 usually it
@@ -76,7 +76,7 @@ As usual, ``#'' and ``@'' may be used to edit input.
 .Bd -unfilled -offset indent -compact
 .Li \&>>> Ns Sy B/3
 .Li \&%%
-.Li \&loading hk(0,0)boot 
+.Li \&loading hk(0,0)boot
 .Li \&Boot
 .Li \&: Sy \&hk(0,0)drtest
 .Li Test program for stand-alone up and hp driver
@@ -94,11 +94,11 @@ As usual, ``#'' and ``@'' may be used to edit input.
 .Em (...to abort halt machine with \&^P)
 .Ed
 .Sh DIAGNOSTICS
-The diagnostics are intended to be self explanatory. Note, however, that 
+The diagnostics are intended to be self explanatory. Note, however, that
 the device number
 in the diagnostic messages is identified as
 .Em typeX
-instead of 
+instead of
 .Em type(a,u)
 where
 .Ar X
diff --git a/share/man/man8/rc.8 b/share/man/man8/rc.8
index 497c401faba..90377593691 100644
--- a/share/man/man8/rc.8
+++ b/share/man/man8/rc.8
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-.\"	$OpenBSD: rc.8,v 1.5 1999/05/23 14:11:23 aaron Exp $
+.\"	$OpenBSD: rc.8,v 1.6 1999/07/09 13:35:36 aaron Exp $
 .\"
 .\" Copyright (c) 1980, 1991, 1993
 .\"	The Regents of the University of California.  All rights reserved.
@@ -50,7 +50,7 @@ is the command script that is invoked by
 .Xr init 8
 during an automatic reboot and after single user mode is exited;
 it performs system housekeeping chores and starts up system daemons.
-.Nm rc.local 
+.Nm rc.local
 is the script holding commands which are pertinent only
 to a specific site.
 .Nm rc.securelevel
diff --git a/share/man/man8/rc.conf.8 b/share/man/man8/rc.conf.8
index 70a0e3c565b..04d3c96f543 100644
--- a/share/man/man8/rc.conf.8
+++ b/share/man/man8/rc.conf.8
@@ -42,7 +42,7 @@ series in order to set shell variables used therein
 to control the behaviour of the scripts.
 .Pp
 There are three sections in this file. The first is used to turn features
-on or off. For example, whether the system runs the 
+on or off. For example, whether the system runs the
 .Nm sendmail
 daemon is determined by the line in this section
 .Bd -literal -indent xxx
@@ -82,7 +82,7 @@ nfsd_flags="-tun 4"
 .Ed
 provides command-line arguments for the nfs server.
 .Pp
-This particular line instructs 
+This particular line instructs
 .Xr nfsd 8
 to start four copies of the server.
 On a busy file server, 8 (or more) copies are recommended.
@@ -93,7 +93,7 @@ On a busy file server, 8 (or more) copies are recommended.
 and the detailed documentation given for each server that is
 configurable in this fashion.
 .Sh HISTORY
-The file 
+The file
 .Nm rc.conf
 first appeared in
 .Ox 2.2 .
diff --git a/share/man/man8/ssl.8 b/share/man/man8/ssl.8
index b8d08b88cbf..cc47fc20b8a 100644
--- a/share/man/man8/ssl.8
+++ b/share/man/man8/ssl.8
@@ -5,9 +5,9 @@
 .Nm ssl
 .Nd details for libssl and libcrypto
 .Sh DESCRIPTION
-This document describes some of the issues relating to the use of 
+This document describes some of the issues relating to the use of
 Eric Young's libssl and libcrypto libraries. This document
-is intended as an overview of what the libraries do, what uses them, 
+is intended as an overview of what the libraries do, what uses them,
 and the slightly unorthodox way of upgrading the library.
 .Pp
 The SSL libraries (libssl and libcrypto) implement the
@@ -23,7 +23,7 @@ are most
 commonly used by the
 .Ar https
 protocol for encrypted web transactions.
-Due to patent issues in the United States, there are 
+Due to patent issues in the United States, there are
 problems with shipping a fully functional implementation of these
 protocols anywhere in the world, as such shipment would include shipping
 .Ar into
@@ -69,7 +69,7 @@ is
 .Pp
 The
 .Ar https
-protocol used by web browsers (in modern incarnations), 
+protocol used by web browsers (in modern incarnations),
 allows for the use of
 .Ar SSL version 3
 and
@@ -115,8 +115,8 @@ The most common uses of
 will require you to generate a server certificate, which is provided by your
 host as evidence of its identity when clients make new connections. The
 certificates reside in the
-.Pa /etc/ssl 
-directory, with the keys in the 
+.Pa /etc/ssl
+directory, with the keys in the
 .Pa /etc/ssl/private
 directory.
 .Pp
@@ -124,7 +124,7 @@ Private keys can be encrypted using
 .Ar 3DES
 and a passphrase to protect their integrity should the encrypted file
 be disclosed, However it is
-important to note that encrypted server keys mean that the passphrase 
+important to note that encrypted server keys mean that the passphrase
 needs to be typed in every time the server is started. If a passphrase
 is not used, you will need to be absolutely sure your key file
 is kept secure.
@@ -170,11 +170,11 @@ shared libraries to support
 as described above. Once that is done,
 you can generate
 .Ar RSA
-certificates that will be usable by 
+certificates that will be usable by
 .Xr httpd 8
 for
 .Ar https
-transactions. 
+transactions.
 .Bd -literal -offset indent
 # ssleay genrsa -out /etc/ssl/private/server.key 1024
 .Ed
@@ -184,7 +184,7 @@ have to type in when starting servers
 .Bd -literal -offset indent
 # ssleay genrsa -des3 -out /etc/ssl/private/server.key 1024
 .Ed
-.Pp 
+.Pp
 The next step is to generate a
 .Ar Certificate Signing Request
 which is used
@@ -201,7 +201,7 @@ This
 .Pa server.csr
 file can then be given to
 .Ar Certifying Authority
-who will sign the key. One such CA is 
+who will sign the key. One such CA is
 .Ar Thawte Certification
 which you can reach at
 .Ar http://www.thawte.com/.
@@ -214,11 +214,11 @@ You can also sign the key yourself, using the command:
   -signkey /etc/ssl/private/server.key -out /etc/ssl/server.crt
 .Ed
 .Pp
-With 
+With
 .Pa /etc/ssl/server.crt
-and 
+and
 .Pa /etc/ssl/private/server.key
-in place, you should be able to start 
+in place, you should be able to start
 .Xr httpd 8
 with the
 .Ar -DSSL
@@ -228,13 +228,13 @@ transactions with your machine on port 443.
 .Sh BUGS
 .Pp
 .Nm ssleay
-and 
+and
 .Nm libssl
 have nearly nonexistent documentation.
 Most documentation consists of examples and README files in
 the sources.  Mail beck@openbsd.org to assist or
 encourage him to finish the job.
-.Pp 
+.Pp
 The world needs more
 .Ar DSA
 capable
diff --git a/share/man/man8/vpn.8 b/share/man/man8/vpn.8
index 25438d045fe..fc41f1da160 100644
--- a/share/man/man8/vpn.8
+++ b/share/man/man8/vpn.8
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-.\" $OpenBSD: vpn.8,v 1.22 1999/07/07 20:04:31 kjell Exp $
+.\" $OpenBSD: vpn.8,v 1.23 1999/07/09 13:35:36 aaron Exp $
 .\" Copyright 1998 Niels Provos <provos@physnet.uni-hamburg.de>
 .\" All rights reserved.
 .\"
@@ -42,19 +42,19 @@ linked via a cryptographically secured tunnel to the security gateway of
 the other subnet.
 .Xr ipsec 4
 is used to provide the necessary network-layer cryptographic services.
-This document describes the configuration process for setting up a 
+This document describes the configuration process for setting up a
 .Nm VPN .
 .Pp
 Briefly, creating a VPN consists of the following steps
 .Bl -enum -compact
 .It
-Choose a key exchange method: manual keyed or 
+Choose a key exchange method: manual keyed or
 .Xr photurisd 8
 .It
 Create a Security Association (SA) for each endpoint
 .It
 Create the appropriate IPSec flows
-.It 
+.It
 Configure your firewall rules appropriately
 .El
 .Ss Choosing a key exchange method
@@ -68,7 +68,7 @@ manual (symmetric shared secret)
 .El
 .Pp
 At present VPNs between private (RFC 1918) networks must use
-manual keying, as  
+manual keying, as
 .Xr photurisd 8
 can only be used if the IP address of the security gateway actually
 falls within the range of addresses being tunnelled to.
@@ -76,11 +76,11 @@ This can clearly never occur if the addresses being tunnelled to
 are non-routable private networks.
 .Ss Generating Manual Keys
 The shared secret symmetric keys used to create a VPN can
-be any hexadecimal value, so long as both sides of the connection use 
-the same values. Since the security of the VPN is based on these keys 
+be any hexadecimal value, so long as both sides of the connection use
+the same values. Since the security of the VPN is based on these keys
 being unguessable, it is very important that the keys be chosen using a
 strong random source. One practical method of generating them
-is by using the 
+is by using the
 .Xr random 4
 device. To produce 160 bits of randomness, for example, do a:
 .Bd -literal
@@ -129,7 +129,7 @@ ipsecadm new esp -spi SPI_OUT -src A_EXTERNAL_IP
          -dst B_EXTERNAL_IP -forcetunnel
          -enc 3des -auth sha1
          -key ENCRYPTION_KEY -authkey AUTHENTICATION_KEY
-   
+
 ipsecadm new esp -spi SPI_IN -src B_EXTERNAL_IP
          -dst A_EXTERNAL_IP -forcetunnel
          -enc 3des -auth sha1
@@ -139,7 +139,7 @@ ipsecadm new esp -spi SPI_IN -src B_EXTERNAL_IP
 .Ss Creating IPSec Flows
 Both IPsec gateways need to configure
 .Xr ipsec 4
-routes with the 
+routes with the
 .Xr ipsecadm 8
 tool:
 .Pp
@@ -175,28 +175,28 @@ ipsecadm flow -dst A_EXTERNAL_IP -spi SPI_OUT -proto esp
                A_EXTERNAL_IP 255.255.255.255
 .Ed
 .Pp
-Furthermore, unless manual keying is used, 
+Furthermore, unless manual keying is used,
 both security gateways need to start the
 .Xr photurisd 8
 key management daemon with the
 .Fl v
-flag and make sure it is configured properly on both sides to 
+flag and make sure it is configured properly on both sides to
 provide the required security services (typically, encryption and
 authentication).
 .Ss Configuring Firewall Rules
 .Xr ipf 8
 needs to be configured such that all packets from the outside are blocked
-by default. Only successfully IPSec-processed packets (from the 
-.Nm enc0 
-interface), or 
-key management packets (for 
-.Xr photurisd 8 , 
+by default. Only successfully IPSec-processed packets (from the
+.Nm enc0
+interface), or
+key management packets (for
+.Xr photurisd 8 ,
 .Tn UDP
 packets with source and destination ports of 468) should be allowed to pass.
-.Pp 
+.Pp
 The
 .Xr ipf 5
-rules for a tunnel which uses encryption (the ESP IPsec protocol) and 
+rules for a tunnel which uses encryption (the ESP IPsec protocol) and
 .Xr photurisd 8
 on security gateway A might look like this:
 .Bd -literal
@@ -221,12 +221,12 @@ If there are no other
 .Xr ipf 5
 rules, the "quick" clause can be added to the last three rules.
 .Sh EXAMPLES
-To create a manual keyed VPN between two class C networks using 
+To create a manual keyed VPN between two class C networks using
 3DES encryption and the following IP addresses:
 .Pp
 .Bd -literal
  A_INTERNAL_IP = 10.0.50.1
- A_EXTERNAL_IP = 192.168.1.254 
+ A_EXTERNAL_IP = 192.168.1.254
  B_EXTERNAL_IP = 192.168.2.1
  B_INTERNAL_IP = 10.0.99.1
 .Ed
@@ -338,9 +338,9 @@ Firewall configuration file
 .El
 .Sh BUGS
 .Xr photurisd 8
-can not be used in VPN mode unless both of the security gateway IP addresses 
+can not be used in VPN mode unless both of the security gateway IP addresses
 lie within the network ranges being tunnelled to.
-In situations where the gateway IP is outside the desired netrange, such 
+In situations where the gateway IP is outside the desired netrange, such
 as with private (RFC 1918) networks, manual keying must be used.
 This should be fixed in the next release.
 .Sh SEE ALSO
diff --git a/share/man/man9/fetch.9 b/share/man/man9/fetch.9
index 56d60387f28..1d19ef7431a 100644
--- a/share/man/man9/fetch.9
+++ b/share/man/man9/fetch.9
@@ -76,7 +76,7 @@ Fetches a word of data from the user-space address
 The
 .Nm
 routines are deprecated.
-All new code should use 
+All new code should use
 .Fn copyin .
 .Sh RETURN VALUES
 The
diff --git a/share/man/man9/inittodr.9 b/share/man/man9/inittodr.9
index c6e70154d67..3ed0d82df42 100644
--- a/share/man/man9/inittodr.9
+++ b/share/man/man9/inittodr.9
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-.\"	$OpenBSD: inittodr.9,v 1.4 1999/05/23 14:11:40 aaron Exp $
+.\"	$OpenBSD: inittodr.9,v 1.5 1999/07/09 13:35:34 aaron Exp $
 .\"	$NetBSD: inittodr.9,v 1.2 1996/03/27 21:16:06 jtc Exp $
 .\"
 .\" Copyright (c) 1994 Christopher G. Demetriou
@@ -52,7 +52,7 @@ Those heuristics include:
 .It
 If the battery-backed clock has a valid time, it is used.
 .It
-If the battery-backed clock does not have a valid time, and 
+If the battery-backed clock does not have a valid time, and
 the time provided in
 .Fa base
 is within reason,
diff --git a/share/man/man9/panic.9 b/share/man/man9/panic.9
index 616d75eaf06..af585a9d8fd 100644
--- a/share/man/man9/panic.9
+++ b/share/man/man9/panic.9
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-.\"	$OpenBSD: panic.9,v 1.1 1997/05/29 15:14:50 kstailey Exp $
+.\"	$OpenBSD: panic.9,v 1.2 1999/07/09 13:35:34 aaron Exp $
 .\"     $NetBSD: panic.9,v 1.2 1996/10/09 17:20:04 explorer Exp $
 .\"
 .\" Copyright (c) 1996 Michael Graff.
@@ -50,7 +50,7 @@ is a
 .Xr printf 3
 style format string.  The message is printed to the console and the location
 pointed to by the global char pointer
-.Fa panicstr 
+.Fa panicstr
 is set to the address of the message text for retrival from the OS
 core dump.
 .Pp
diff --git a/share/man/man9/shutdownhook_establish.9 b/share/man/man9/shutdownhook_establish.9
index c10940e7f59..9e70584eb0a 100644
--- a/share/man/man9/shutdownhook_establish.9
+++ b/share/man/man9/shutdownhook_establish.9
@@ -71,7 +71,7 @@ rely on many system services (including file systems, and timeouts
 and other interrupt-driven services), or even basic system
 integrity (because the system could be rebooting after a crash).
 .Sh RETURN VALUES
-If successful, 
+If successful,
 .Fn shutdownhook_establish
 returns an opaque pointer describing the newly established
 shutdown hook.  Otherwise, it returns NULL.
diff --git a/share/man/man9/spl.9 b/share/man/man9/spl.9
index 870a1338117..ccc88882655 100644
--- a/share/man/man9/spl.9
+++ b/share/man/man9/spl.9
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-.\"	$OpenBSD: spl.9,v 1.2 1999/05/23 14:11:40 aaron Exp $
+.\"	$OpenBSD: spl.9,v 1.3 1999/07/09 13:35:35 aaron Exp $
 .\"	$NetBSD: spl.9,v 1.1 1997/03/11 06:15:05 mikel Exp $
 .\"
 .\" Copyright (c) 1997 Michael Long.
@@ -87,7 +87,7 @@ are:
 .Bl -tag -width splsoftserialXX
 .It Fn splhigh
 blocks all hard and soft interrupts.  It is used for code that cannot
-tolerate any interrupts, like hardware context switching code and 
+tolerate any interrupts, like hardware context switching code and
 the
 .Xr ddb 4
 in-kernel debugger.
diff --git a/share/man/man9/store.9 b/share/man/man9/store.9
index 0fe51a5948e..3a2d5c4cb1f 100644
--- a/share/man/man9/store.9
+++ b/share/man/man9/store.9
@@ -84,7 +84,7 @@ to the user-space address
 The
 .Nm
 routines are deprecated.
-All new code should use 
+All new code should use
 .Fn copyout .
 .Sh RETURN VALUES
 The
diff --git a/share/man/man9/time.9 b/share/man/man9/time.9
index 98352b5fda4..b71177b8b65 100644
--- a/share/man/man9/time.9
+++ b/share/man/man9/time.9
@@ -70,7 +70,7 @@ The
 .Va runtime
 variable holds the time that the system switched to the
 current process.
-It is set after each context switch, 
+It is set after each context switch,
 and is updated when the system time is adjusted with
 .Xr settimeofday 2 .
 Because
diff --git a/share/termtypes/termcap.5 b/share/termtypes/termcap.5
index b750b416c1c..0c684ce8b1b 100644
--- a/share/termtypes/termcap.5
+++ b/share/termtypes/termcap.5
@@ -30,7 +30,7 @@
 .\" SUCH DAMAGE.
 .\"
 .\"     from: @(#)termcap.5	6.11 (Berkeley) 3/6/93
-.\"	$Id: termcap.5,v 1.5 1999/07/08 09:41:43 hugh Exp $
+.\"	$Id: termcap.5,v 1.6 1999/07/09 13:35:49 aaron Exp $
 .\"
 .Dd March 6, 1993
 .Dt TERMCAP 5
@@ -1808,7 +1808,7 @@ user preferences.
 .It Pa /usr/share/misc/termcap
 File containing terminal descriptions.
 .It Pa /usr/share/misc/termcap.db
-Hash database file containing terminal descriptions (see 
+Hash database file containing terminal descriptions (see
 .Xr cap_mkdb 1 ) .
 .El
 .Sh SEE ALSO